Home

GX Works 2 Operating Manual Simp

1. o 2 H lt sa a b Transition lt 3 Simultaneous convergence condition m number MO Simultaneous convergence i simultaneous divergence lt Z rr H N Simultaneous convergence selection divergence LLI 2 og 26 Selection divergence ae simultaneous divergence 7 Ow Simultaneous convergence N selection convergence 24 or Transition 8 condition number j Jump destination step number iY O 25 N X GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS Table 7 1 1 List of SFC symbols for QCPU mode LCPU 3 3 Symbol MELSAP3 MELSAP L End step transition Simultaneous convergence jump Simultaneous convergence selection divergence jump a b Transition condition Transition Simultaneous convergence number selection convergence j Jump destination jump 3 step number Selection divergence jump Selection convergence jump 7 1 List of SFC Symbols FXCPU Table 7 1 2 List of SFC symbols for
2. 10 7 10 2 3 Executing online program change simultaneously with conversion compilation 10 7 10 2 4 Changing operating conditions of compilation 10 8 10 3 Compilation 10 10 10 3 1 Compilation target data when compiling all 10 10 1032 aedes e aaa oat tao 10 11 10 3 3 Precautions on 10 14 10 4 Checking for Errors and Warnings 10 18 104 1 GCorrec ng errors and warnings cisco sie et ee es 10 19 11 WRITING READING DATA TO FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 1t011 6 11 1 Writing Reading Data to from Programmable Controller CPU 11 2 12 MONITORING 12 11012 16 12 1 Starting Stopping Monitoring of Programs 12 2 12 2 Starting and Stopping Monitoring of Function Blocks 12 3 12 3 Changing Operating Conditions of Monitoring 12 4 12 3 1 Changing current value display format decimal hexadecimal of word type variable 12 4 12 3 2 Monitoring buffer memory and link 12 5 12 3 8 Switching to FXGP DOS FXGP WIN display format 12 6 12 4 Monitoring Ladder Programs 12 7 12 5 Monitoring SFC Programs 12 8 1254 Monitoring SEC
3. 8 2 Searching for statements and notes 9 20 selection convergence RN 7 17 selection divergence 7 15 series transition 7 13 SFC All Block Batch Monitoring 12 13 F DK 7 41 SFO Plock ISi 7 43 SFG COMNEN T T 9 30 FL h NC CM 2 14 SFG ROW SGMINO 2 20 FUND D 7 2 7 10 SFC step active inactive status 12 14 SFC step attribute 7 11 7 29 SFC step comment 2 17 7 11 7 12 9 30 SFC step number en 2 17 SFC step transition comments 2 19 simple editing of devices labels 6 8 Simple project REE na 22 simultaneous convergence 7 19 simultaneous divergence 7 16 SOMO 29221254 TD 7 32 Specification of module I O number 8 5 specified step number pp 8 3 start destination block number 2 17 7 12 start destination blocks 20 12 9 INDEX 4 Starting monitoring of programs
4. 12 8 1252 JMIORItOFIBg WANS IONS va R 12 11 12 5 3 Monitoring operation outputs and transition conditions 12 12 12 5 4 Batch monitoring all blocks monitoring active 12 13 12 5 5 Monitoring SEG block IISE uit E ER anu 12 15 13 SETTING OPTIONS 13 1to 13 6 13 1 Basic Operations 13 2 13 2 Option Setting List 13 3 APPENDIX App 1 to App 16 Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys App 2 Appendix 1 1 Common toolbars and shortcut App 2 Appendix 1 2 Navigation Window toolbar App 6 Appendix 1 3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels App 7 Appendix 1 4 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory App 8 Appendix 1 5 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result App 9 Appendix 1 6 Toolbar icons for executing sampling App 9 Appendix 1 7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors App 10 Appendix 1 8 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I O system setting function App 15 Append
5. 9 3 9 4 9 9 9 14 9 28 Personal Computer 5 21 J H Z LU gt 9 lt LU STATEMENTS NOTES CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS lt x Q T LLI oc E c MONITORING SETTING OPTIONS APPENDIX GX Works2 INDEX PEO Je 9 3 pointer number 6 15 9 3 9 5 9 6 9 14 project View 4 2 property Of SFC programs 7 46 Q OCPU Q mode sv A 21 R Read TOM PEG 11 2 read MOdE 6 3 Redisplaying SFC diagrams 7 33 Registering undefined labels 6 9 Replacing module I O numbers 8 5 required manuals A 12 reset destination step number 2 17 8 9 Rc p 1 11 Restoring PEPPER 6 54 Right base line scsi 2 3 RET 5 FUSO ERE 6 6 Rising Pulse Branch pp 6 6 Rising Pulse Close 2 22 6 6 Rising Pulse Close Branch 6 6 ROW se 2 8 5 Search and Replace
6. 22 6 41 NESEN MOTE 6 35 6 48 6 52 NET RON Ave 6 41 Inserting columns pp 6 43 Inserting lines within line statements 9 16 Instruction check 10 3 Instruction device entry field 6 7 interrupt pointer number 6 15 9 3 9 5 9 6 9 14 Invert Operation Results 6 6 J Gare 6 3 8 6 8 7 8 10 9 20 jump destination step number 2 17 8 9 7 22 Jumping to ladder block start 6 31 Jumping to specified statement and note 9 20 L Label Name 2 2 0 0 02 0 2 5 11 5 20 WAGOER CHOGK sarte 10 3 Ladder Editor eee eee ae 2 3 Ladder Symbol xod er 6 6 Ladder symbol selection field 6 7 Lett perverse 2 3 ENE STACI GIG Havre 9 3 AKMEO ve M MENES seede maser COMMON ss EU Merge Process Leke Modifying NOIES see Modifying statements Modifying statements and notes monitor Write mode arve 6 4 MIOMMOPIMOGS eH 6 4 monitoring a program pp 12 2 Monitoring buffer memory and link
7. 5 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 7 3 11 Inserting deleting rows and columns T 25 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS lt Deleting a row gt Edit gt Delete Row gt Edit gt Delete Column 5 74 7 26 7 3 11 Inserting deleting rows columns 7 4 Deleting SFC Diagrams 7 4 Deleting SFC Diagrams This section explains how to delete entered SFC symbols OVERVIEW 7 4 1 Deleting SFC symbols by setting range 2 7 84 29 Delete SFC symbols by setting range Operating procedure BO 3 1 Specify the range to be deleted by dragging the cursor 2 Zy OO OO EE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 2 Select Edit Delete EE Point Selecting a range The range can be selected by pressing the Shift key Im keys Deleting symbols Symbols can be deleted by pressing the Deletel key or by selecting Edit gt Cut Canceling the previous operation After deleting symbols the editing status before the deletion is restored by selecting Edit Undo SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Q 2 lt c t LLI 0o REPLACE 7 4 1 Deleting SFC symbols by setting a range Taf GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 4 2 Deleting only divergence convergence vertical lines Delete divergence convergence
8. Select STATEMENTS NOTES H O o lt E 7 gt lt a gt 9 2 gt 20 Lu a m aS O22 Sea lt lt a LU ra 2 LoS CD 2 O D O O lt APPENDIX INDEX GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES Displaying line statements on tree view Display a line statement on a tree view of the Navigation window This function is not supported by FXCPU projects without labels n g p roce d ure Statement Note Batch Edit Line Statement Statement I Statement Note 1 Select a line statement to be displayed 23 32 Statement3 tree view sah eres at Select 3 None In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note 2 Check the Display in Navigation Window item Pis ete par lal Line Top FETTE Display Ww Ladder Bottom Display i in Navigation Window Title is inserted in front of the line statement peron Bottom Jump Cancel me Statement 5 1 emreBtaemnt 220244441 o EE Inserting rows within line statements Insert a row within line statements Operating procedure 1 Select a Statement for wh ch a row is to Statement Note Batch Edit Line Statement p Stateme
9. Changing SFC Step Attributes Cutting copying and pasting SFC diagrams Sorting SFC Step Transition Numbers of SFC Diagram Redisplaying SFC Diagrams Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions Setting Block Displaying SFC Block List Setting Parameters for SFC Programs Precautions on Creating Programs in MELSAP L Changing T C Setting Values OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SCREEN QJ 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS On 0 oc 7 lt 9 EKO Av 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 1 List of SFC Symbols The following tables show the list of symbols used in SFC programs B QCPU mode LCPU Table 7 1 1 List of SFC symbols for QCPU mode LCPU 1 3 Symbol a MELSAP3 MELSAP L SFC step 0 Remarks Dummy initial step Any one of these steps in a single block T Initial step number at Stored coil initial ste ab a0 i top left first column Stored operation without transition is fixed to O check Stored operation with transition check Reset initial step oles E step
10. Select Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder gt Ladder Diagram 2 E M Display STL instruction in contact format Only applies to the FXCPU d 2 E 99 Example When the item is not selected 3 30 Start of step ladder vooo 2 ul 55 v001 T Q OO OO MO DO M4 N State 50 y M3 O Oz i 520 5 RET End of step ladder i 2 When the item is selected 2 50 Start of step Hsu vooo ladder N _ it b SET MO 1 c LLI MOV K3 00 1 a 5 lt 2 Pp iY 5 26 11 lt v003 Q 13 RST M3 1 8 A x000 1 16 Jp cet 820 wn tT 4 End of step 2 x001 ladder EO 20 e 1 Do not enter contacts in the coil instruction part which is connected to the first coil instruction of the STL 8 instruction The ladder to which a contact is entered cannot be displayed in this method When entering contacts enter them from the base line TO 25 2 2 10 Displaying step ladder STL instruction in contact format 2 13 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 3 SFC Editor This section explains the screen display of the SFC editor and its basic operations 2 3 1 Editing screen The following explains the editing screen used for creating SFC diagrams display format be selected for QCPU
11. Category Name Symbol Remarks Ladder Ladder block Up to 11 blocks ina block list One step in each block Initial step i Step number 0 to 9 Step OVERVIEW 2 E Up to 512 steps in 7 each block 209 i Step number m 10 to 999 og Series transition 3 NE GE j zu Selection divergence x ru Center Right edge 2 na KE Selection convergence Left edge Simultaneous divergence PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Transition Simultaneous convergence Right edge SETTING LABELS JUMP transition i Step number j Jump destination step number Reset JUMP j ES EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC 5 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 2 Difference between MELSAP3 and MELSAP L mmm This section explains the difference between MELSAP3 MELSAP L A display format can be selected for QCPU Q mode LCPU For details refer to Section 2 3 6 B MELSAP3 MELSAP3 is a description format which provides easy to understand configurations and controls of an entire program by describing the operating order of machines and equipment using SFC diagrams and creating operation outputs and transition conditio
12. 2 Set argument of the template in the selected status from Mans temple the right by selecting the menu each time 5 Edit FB Instance Rename an FB instance name Section 6 3 4 lt Documentation 209 Statement Edit statements oo Section 9 2 Statement Note Batch Edit Batch edit the statements notes in the program Section 9 3 Easy Edit B 2 Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the Connect Line to Right Side Symbol right of the cursor position 5 3 ru Connect Line to Left Side Symbol Connect horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the 9 left of the cursor position rc iti Section 6 6 zd un Enter Delete HLine Rightward Enter delete a line at the right of the cursor position i Enter Delete HLine Leftward Enter delete a line at the left of the cursor position Enter Delete VLine Downward Enter delete a line at the downward of the cursor position 0 2 Enter Delete VLine Upward Enter delete a line at the upward of the cursor position 2 Switch Open Close Contact Switch between an open contact and a closed contact Common 5 2 Switch Statement Note Type Change the type of a statement note Section 9 4 2 Instruction Partial Edit Display the Enter Symbol screen in which the first argument Section 6 2 Y is in the selected status Find Replace function for editing in ladder language Reference Change Module I O
13. OVERVIEW This setting can be set when STEP is selected for Symbol 4 Enter a reset destination step number when the reset step R is selected for gt Block Reset Step Attribute rr Enter SFC step comments Up to 32 characters can be entered The created gt Comment comments can be displayed by selecting View gt SFC Step Transition gt 3 Comment it rz Enter programs 52 Program 2 For entering MELSAP L programs refer to the following section lt Section 7 9 2 Section 7 9 3 3 1 Not supported by FXCPU 2 Applicable to MELSAP L instruction format MELSAP L start conditions format 2 32 OO 4 Click the button 99 entered SFC step symbol is displayed lt Overwrite mode gt 70 ap Enter SFC step 1 gt PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 11 Insert mode SETTING LABELS Enter SFC step 3 gt Avertical line is inserted automatically to the other divergence EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 5 22 Point ES GE Changing the SFC step attributes The SFC step attributes of created SFC steps can be changed by selecting Edit gt SFC Step Attribute gt SFC 8 step attribute Section 7 5 Z lt L 95 i N X 7 3 1 Entering SFC steps fali GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 3 2 Entering block start steps F HE mmm Enter a block sta
14. ep SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 6 Drawing Lines This section explains how to draw lines 6 6 1 6 32 Vertical Line mm Horizontal Line Enter horizontal line consecutively tAE 8 8 ct zi d 3 Drawing lines Draw vertical and horizontal lines consecutively Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where a vertical line is drawn A line is drawn taking the left edge of the cursor as base point x10 2 Y20 4 END Select Edit gt Edit Line tz Drag the cursor in the line drawing direction x10 2 Y20 d 18 The line is drawn upon completion of dragging end the line drawing function select Edit gt Edit Line 5 again The edit line mode is disabled 6 6 1 Drawing lines 6 6 Drawing Lines 6 6 2 Entering vertical or horizontal lines Enter a vertical or horizontal line Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where vertical or horizontal line is entered OVERVIEW vertical line is entered taking the left edge of the cursor as base point Z x100 O 2 Y100 2 4 END 55 2 Select Edit gt Ladder Symbol gt Vertical Line ta 3 The Enter VLine s
15. 22 EEr AFARS 2 2 wrapping pp 6 55 6 56 6 57 6 58 wrapping destination symbol 6 17 wrapping source symbol 6 16 Wite MOG NET d 6 3 Write to 11 2 11 2 2 OO 7 34 SALON SLNAWALVLS ONILIGA O LLI q YJTIOYLNOO ONIYOLINON SNOILdO ONILLAS lt X3QNI INDEX 5 Microsoft Windows registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Simple Project GXW2 VER1 O SP E 13JU64 SH NA 080780ENG K 1109 KWIX MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
16. GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 2 6 Setting number of rows and columns for displaying comments Set the number of rows and columns for displaying device comment using the option setting Screen display Select View gt Display Format for Device Comment Device Comment Display Format Row 4 vi Column 8 Total Characters 32 Operating procedure e Set the items on the screen Item Description Row Set the number of display rows in the range from 1 to 4 rows Column Set the number of display columns to 5 or 8 columns Examples 4 rows x 8 columns 2 rows x 5 columns 1 x pp I I COMENT3 gt COMEN COMENT 3 7 COMENT3 COMENTS 2 8 2 2 6 Setting number of rows and columns for displaying comments 2 2 Ladder Editor 2 2 7 Setting number of contacts to be displayed in ladder programs Set the number of contacts to be displayed single row using the option setting The default setting is 11 contacts Screen display NG OVERVIEW Select Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder gt Ladder Diagram 2 E Display Format i zo Display Connection of Ladder Diagram m Contacts m 56 nO Operating procedure 3 Set the items on the screen Z Item Description gt 12 2 Select the number of contacts to be displayed in single row T Q e 9 contacts Q Display Connection of Ladder 11 contacts Diagram 13 contacts 17 con
17. Back to User Default Restores the user default settings set as User Default Stores the current settings as the user default and applies them to a new project 13 2 13 2 Option Setting List 13 2 Option Setting List J Z LU gt 9 LU STATEMENTS NOTES The following table shows the option setting items Project gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Tool Hint Structured 2 9 Ladder FBD FB FUN 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project z 2 z 528 Ladder SFC 5 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 11 Select whether to display the label comment Device Comment 2c En or the device comment at ladder editor E c Note Select whether to display the note comment Section 9 m at ladder editor 2 24 Qo Comment DY Select whether to display the statement Statement Zo comment at ladder editor O Device Comment Set the display rows and columns for label Section SES Display Format comment or device comment 2 2 6 Display Connection of Section Ladder Diagram Set the number of contacts to be displayed 227 Select whether to display STL instruction in 5 Display STL instruction contact format This is valid for simple 2 Section oc in contact format projects Not using labels only Contact 2240 FXCPU Only format ladder block display for STL n Z instruction is not wrap disp
18. Searches for line statements that contain the character string entered the Find field toward up down direction from the cursor 3 lt o Refresh Updates the line statement list fi 2 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES 9 7 Merge Process when Reading Programs from Programmable Controller CPU This section explains the merge process when reading sequence programs contain Peripheral statements notes created in the project without labels from the programmable controller CPU For FXCPU the merge process is executed automatically when reading data from a programmable controller CPU Thus the setting is not necessary 9 7 1 Merge process The character data of Peripheral statements notes are not written to the programmable controller CPU when sequence programs are written to the programmable controller CPU By executing the merge process when reading sequence programs from the programmable controller CPU the character data of Peripheral statements notes saved in the personal computer are merged with the sequence programs stored in the programmable controller CPU and displayed in the ladder Sequence program data saved in the personal computer Sequence program data written to the Write to PLC programmable controller CPU lt QCPU Q mode LCPU gt Character data of Peripheral statements and Peripheral notes are not written to the programmable controller CPU
19. 7 45 7 12 2 Setting the property Of SFC 7 46 7 13 Precautions on Creating Programs MELSAP L 7 48 7 14 Changing T C Setting Values 7 50 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 1to8 12 8 1 Searching for and Replacing Data in Ladder Programs 8 2 8 1 1 Searching for devices labels 8 2 8 1 2 Jumping to the specified step 8 3 8 1 3 Changing the module start I O 8 4 8 2 Searching for and Replacing Data in SFC Programs 8 6 8 2 1 Jumping to specified SFC step number transition number SFC diagram 8 6 8 2 2 Searching for jump with step number SFC diagram 8 7 8 2 3 Jumping to specified SFC step number block number SFC diagram 8 8 8 2 4 Replacing SFC step number SFC 8 9 8 2 5 Searching for blocks on SFC block 8 10 8 2 6 Searching for devices on SFC block 8 11 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES 9 1109 30 9 1 Editing Device Comments 9 2 9 2 Editing Statements and Notes 9 2 9 2 1 Statements and MOUS ae 9 2 9 2 2 5 couse 9 4 9 2 3 Modifying and deleting statements nennen nennen nennen nnn 9 7 9 2
20. TRUE PE ny VAR GLOBAL v VAR GLOBAL VAR GLOBAL VAR GLOBAL v Label Name Constant sLabell O Product Data Struct JDetailSetting Struct pt Disclose 4 grobal bit quo Browse jgrobal bir i eV WEISS ESSE Se grobal_bit2 Link nen me GE eus Local Label Setting screen Define labels that can be used only for each sequence program 037 Section 5 3 To reflect the changes of the table above to the systen label database please save the project after compiling Program Setting F Q Program 8 MAIN sk Program O leae Ze FB Fool Ed FB SYOKIKA Program Es Local Label Setting MAIN PRG Label Name Data Type SYOKIKA_ ST FB SYOKIKA leselig Tank Temperature WordfSigned 4 Tank Temperature wordfSigned Switch Bit o Switch B Bi PP max Constant Device Comment Local Label I Structured Data Types 4 ora Device Comment B Device Memory Device Initial value Function FB Label Setting screen Define labels that can be used only for function blocks Section 5 4 Constant Comment Addon Data irou vaine Bt Input Variable 2 Word Signed Operation Result Wwordsigned _ FB output Data Type VAR INPUT V R INPUT V R IN OUT m Structure Setting screen
21. 12 2 statement dM 9 4 Statements and Notes 9 2 SU 2 2 DISD NUMDET UK Ee Sw 2 3 Stopping monitoring of function blocks 12 3 Stopping monitoring of programs 12 2 SIOPS COMPIENON Ledere 10 8 ERE 5 20 SME NN Om 5 23 structure array type M 5 23 Structure Device Setting screen 5 21 5 23 5 24 Structured Data Setting pp 5 20 structured data type 5 20 Structured Data Types 5 15 Structured project A 22 T setting value 6 62 BET ER TTC 2 2 2 3 TODT 2 2 HANSON T TET 7 3 7 4 transition comment 21 2 2 17 7 14 9 30 Transition number 2 17 two or three dimensional array 5 16 TS 9 3 U unconverted 10 2 OO 6 53 Using bit specification 5 22 5 25 V Vertical Line 6 32 W Warning EEE EE NE EE 10 18 warning message pp 10 9
22. 6 41 Delete Horizontal Line 6 38 Delete Line 0 044 6 38 Delete ROW 6 41 Delete Vertical Line 6 38 Deleting a ladder block 6 37 Deleting columns 6 44 Deleting lines of line statements 9 17 Deleting EEE 6 42 Deleting SFC diagrams 7 27 Deleting statements 9 8 Detail Setting 5 4 5 9 Device 220020211 5 4 5 9 5 21 5 23 Device check 10 3 Device Comment 2 0 2 2 22 9 2 13 3 Device Comment Display Format 13 3 device types for function blocks 6 24 Display Connection of Ladder Diagram 2 9 display format 12 4 12 6 13 4 Docking WINdOW pp 2 2 OO 6 19 ens EEE 7 35 7 10 Duplicated coil check pp 10 3 E Edit FB Instance pp 6 22 ELLE ve 6 32 editing screen 4 2 3 6 2 END IN 2 3 END SIED ee 7 23 Enter Line Statement 2 2 2 9 4 ES 9 9 Enter P I Statement 4 9 5 Enter Symbol screen pp 6 6 Enter VLine screen 4
23. BENE Class LabeName Data Type 1 VAR_GLOBAL Initial Setting 21 2 3 Initial Setting C Sting32 y oad To change the array to a two or three dimensional array Edit two or three dimensional array by directly entering the array type declaration in text on each label setting screen Class Data GLOBAL VAR GLOBAL Initial Setting E Bt 62E VAR GLOBAL Initial Setting Eit D 2 0 2 0 2 5 5 3 Selecting data types 5 5 Common Operations for Setting Labels Point When a constant type is set for Class For labels whose classes are set as VAR CONSTANT or VAR GLOBAL CONSTANT arrays cannot be set for the data type If they are set an error occurs at compilation Offset values Minus values can be set for offset values Using arrays in the ladder The labels of two or three dimensional array and structure array type cannot be used in the ladder OVERVIEW Setting data length of character string data type SCREEN CONFIGURATION Set the data length of the character string data type To change the data length of the character string data type directly edit the data length on each label setting screen The initial value of data length of the character string data type 15 set in the option setting e Select Tool gt Options
24. Enter FES Press the Enter key f Initial processing Ok ipheral um The Enter Line Statement screen is displayed Me blind tm ne EN Enter Line Statement Check Display in Navigation Window or enter MAC Title in front of the line statement p MONITORING Click the OK button B Program Select Compile gt Build puo mm Control 21525651 The line statement is displayed on a tree view Automatic operation program When multiple line statements tree view exist in single d s Count t Ber of interrupt ladder block only the uppermost line statement is displayed on d dh a tree view ES Local Label CD 2 O D O O lt LLI Point Displaying line statements of POUs on tree view x Only the line statements of programs can be displayed on a tree view Even if entering Title in front of the line statement of function block the line statements cannot be displayed a a tree view Maximum number of line statements on tree view The maximum number of line statements on a tree view single program is 100 The maximum number of line statements on a tree view in single project is 800 When multiple line statements on a tree view exist in single ladder block only the uppermost line statement is displayed and the others are not however
25. MITSUBISHI MELSOFT uM Integrated FA Software GX Works2 vso Operating Manual oimple Project Name Filtering Cond Filtering Condition ition Step No 2 Device pd Step No 5 Device Inj ces Infomation of Al Device Labet 11 Reference output Simple Deviced bel DstaTipe Deion Conner 1 ai m x EN X ail Ex os Ne 00 WardSizred 00 ail va va MELSOFT ntegrated FA Software E SW1DNC GXW2 E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these instructions before using this product Before using this product thoroughly read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual and pay careful attention to safety and handle the products properly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the User s Manual for the CPU module In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as N WARNING and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in A WARNING death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage N CAUTION tam Note that the NCAUTION le
26. PRG Write MAIN 12 Step 5 INC Data A 84 SendDATA 1 gt 2 B BIN DATA OUT DATA B OutDataA LJ LL LL N1 M1000 T 5 NO TING D20 3 Read mode monitor mode 2 T z oelect when operating other than editing the ladders 50 Enter device directly on the program editor to display the Find screen search for device SS ru The color of the cursor turns to dark blue as shown below in the read mode monitor mode aa Read only is displayed on the screen title PRG Read MAIN Read Only 12 Step INC Data SendDATA 1 DATA OUT DATA B OutDataA N1 M1000 PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS B Switching between read mode and write mode owitch between read mode and write mode on the active program editor ep SETTING LABELS Operating procedure e Select Edit gt Ladder Edit Mode gt Read Mode amp Write Mode 2 The mode is switched between Read mode and Write mode EDITING LADDER 44 PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 1 2 Switching between write mode and read mode 6 3 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Switching between monitor mode and monitor write mode Switch between monitor mode and monitor write mode on the active program editor during monitoring For details of monitoring refer to Chapter 12
27. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Operating procedure e Set the items on the screen Item Description Display elements of the structure array in tree format Structure Array The device setting of the element selected in the tree is displayed in the right area of the screen SETTING LABELS Label Name Display label names defined as structure Data Type Display data types set to data names Set device names to be assigned Device names can be entered for the start array element only For the subsequent array elements device names offset from the device number set for the start element are automatically set Word Device Bit Specify the device offset value to be set to the same data type cells in the array Structure Array Device element Offset Value Use Bit E Check this to specify a bit device of word device Designation Device EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 52 USC og EO Display on the Local Label Setting screen nia For the Structure Device Setting screen the read only screen is displayed 8 a lt TO N X 5 6 4 Assigning devices to structure array type labels 5 23 r GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Entering device names automatically by setting offset values On the Structure Device Setting screen device numbers to be entered automatically can be set in fixed spacing for each array element of the structure array Specify the difference in device numbers
28. TL STULTE 2 11 2 2 10 Displaying step ladder STL instruction in contact format pp 2 13 2 3 SFC Editor 2 14 2 3 1 ENG er 2 14 2 3 2 Changing display size of editing 2 18 2 3 3 Displaying MELSAP L programs on SFC diagram 2 19 2 3 4 Displaying hiding SFC step transition 2 19 2 3 5 Setting number of columns for SFC diagram 2 20 2 3 6 Changing SFC display format 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 1 Creating Programs 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 1 Program Configurations of Simple Project 5 SETTING LABELS 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 Label Setting Screens Setting Global Labels Setting Local Labels for Programs Setting Local Labels for Function Blocks Common Operations for Setting Labels 5 5 1 CHASS OS 5 5 2 BIENE AR E e EE M NE 5 5 3 Selec ihg daa types n ee 5 5 4 ENG WOW S ae Setting Structured Data Type Labels 5 6 1 Setting data type 5 6 2 Setting data type as 5 6 3 Assigning devices to structured data type 5 6 4 Assigning devices to structure array type labels Setting Ranges for Devices Assigned Automa
29. 3 For FXCPU the item is supported by FX3G FX3U and FX3UC only 13 6 SALON SLNAWALVLS SLN3INAWOO ONILIGA x e z A Q lt P SN MELSOFT uu SIAVHOOHd ONITIANOD ONI LH3ANOO q TioyJNOO N J9YANYYOOUdWOHH OL VIVQ ONIAV3H DNILIYM ONISHO LINOIN App 2 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys Appendix 1 co q SNOILdO ONLLLSS 454 XIGNAddV rmm X3QNI GX Works2 APPENDIX Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys This section shows the list of toolbars and shortcut keys that can be used in Simple project For Common Structure and Intelligent indicated in the Reference column refer to the following manuals respectively Common GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Structure GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project Intelligent GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module Appendix 1 1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys The following explains the toolbars that are available regardless of the editing target and the corresponding shortcut keys B Standard toolbar icons The following table shows the Standard toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys em Mina fom omme GX Works2 Help Display the GX Works2 Help screen Search for help items with an entered keyword the G
30. Device List Display the usage of devices Find Device Search device label in the program gt Find Instruction Search an instruction 2 LLI ap Find Contact Coil Search a contact or coil corresponding to the specified 3 device Find String Search string 2 Replace Device Replace a device label in the program Common 2 Replace Instruction Replace an instruction 2 Replace String Replace a string 5 2 TO Change Open Close Contact Change an open contact to a closed contact or change a uc closed contact to an open contact Z Device Batch Replace Batch replace devices with the specified device Register to Device Batch Replace Register selected devices on the Device Batch Replace 3 screen 2 Zy Compile common function Reference gt 5 Q Build Convert compile a program being edited Section 10 2 1 z E Online Program Change Write sequence programs to programmable controller CPU Section 10 2 3 after the conversion compilation Rebuild All Convert compile all programs in the project Section 10 2 2 Common 0 2 View common function Reference 4 Toolbar 23 c oO Statusbar Display hide the status bar Set the display color for characters such as labels device Color and Font comments on the work window Docking Window Navigation Window Display hide the Navigation window Common Display hide the Function Block Selection window Select
31. PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Q 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 3 10 Drawing lines Draw a divergence line and a convergence line by dragging the mouse Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt Edit Line Vertical Line Segment Selection Divergence Simultaneous Divergence Selection Convergence Simultaneous Convergence 2 Drag the cursor from the start position for entering lines to the end position 90 Drag the mouse to the end position Point Overwriting lines Even when lines are overwritten to the created SFC steps transitions SFC steps transitions and sequence programs in the operation outputs transition conditions are not deleted 7 24 7 3 10 Drawing lines 7 3 Creating 5 Diagrams 7 3 11 Inserting deleting rows and columns Insert delete row and column Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Move the cursor to the position where row or column is inserted deleted 2 lt 2 operation as shown below N Q Inserting a row uu OO NO Edit Insert Row Z 25 gt qd OO OO ru na PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS lt Inserting column Edit Insert Column 5 SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC
32. PROGRAMS lt x Q T LLI oc c The following table shows the number of characters that can be entered for statement or note Name Line statement 64 characters P statement 64 characters I statement Note 32 characters Types of statement and note PLC and Peripheral are the types of statement and note Name Applicable model Line statement P statement PLC statement Line statement P statement QCPU Q mode Peripheral statement LCPU FXCPU Point Statement note types for FXCPU QCPU mode LCPU Number of characters MONITORING Function CD 2 O D O O lt LLI Statements and notes be stored in the programmable controller CPU PLC statement uses the following number of steps 2 steps Decimal fraction is rounded up Statements and notes cannot be stored in the programmable Only the Peripheral statement note function is available for FXCPU The settings regarding PLC Peripheral type described in this section cannot be used Precautions when editing Peripheral statements notes in FXCPU he positioning data cannot be stored in FXCPU Steps are not expended in FXCPU projects without labels 9 2 1 Statements and notes X controller CPU Only the position information can be stored E Statements and notes must be saved in a peripheral equipment statement or not
33. Shift T to the project being edited gt SETTING OPTIONS Close the project being edited and exits gt lt Fa GX Works 2 Ctrl Cross Reference Create the cross reference information x _ Ctrl 2 D Device List Display the device list Common Move to the next cross reference information Move to the previous cross reference information fi _ Move focus between the Cross Reference window work windows Find Device Search for device label in the program Find String Search for a string Replace Device Replace a device label in the program Replace String Replace a string Appendix 1 1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys App 5 GX Works2 APPENDIX Toolbar icon Ctrl Shortcut key Search for an item in the downward direction Search for an item in the upward direction Start monitoring the current values of registered devices labels and intelligent function module EB E Ctrl Start Watching Stop monitoring the current values of Common registered devices labels and intelligent function module Register Device Test with Register the device test with execution Execution Condition condition Close the window displayed in the uppermost position Stop Watching shift A Ctrl Enter Ctrl 4 Ctrl F6 Move to the next
34. mode LCPU Select MELSAP3 to edit operation output and transition condition programs on the Zoom editor window Select MELSAP L instruction format or MELSAP L start conditions format to edit operation output and transition condition programs on the SFC editor window For switching the display format refer to Section 2 3 6 Screen display Select Project view gt POU gt Program gt program gt block gt Program lt MELSAP3 FXCPU gt PRG 000 Block AAR PRG 000 Block Transition No 0 t SFC editor window Zoom editor window Display contents Item Description SFC editor window Used to edit SFC diagrams Zoom editor window Used to edit operation output and transition condition programs 2 14 2 3 1 Editing screen 2 3 SFC Editor Point Displaying SFC editor window and Zoom editor window By the following setting the Zoom editor window can be automatically displayed side by side when the SFC editor window is opened The display of SFC editor and Zoom editor can be selected from Tiling Horizontally or Tiling Vertically Select Tile SFC and Zoom vertically under Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt SFC gt SFC Diagram When this setting is valid the setting of Open Zoom with New Window under Tool gt Options gt Program Editor SFC Zoom becomes invalidated Moving a cursor of the SFC editor window the Zoom editor window With the activated Zoo
35. CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS 2 Click the vet button The selected line statement is deleted 15 statement2 311 32 statements moe 45 5tatement4 lt x D zZ Q T LLI or 22 Moving statements or notes Move a statement or note Operating procedure 1 Select a statement or note to be moved Line Statement Statement I Statement Note statement Line Statement a 2 To move a line statement select the 7 type Line or Ladder MONITORING 2 Li n e 5 th e 5 ected n e Mone In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note 2 DL statement in unit of row O T fe In PLC 1 In Peripheral Change Type CD Ladder Moves the selected line 2 ere 2 i CL Display in Navigation Window statement in unit of ladder vi Top Bottom block OK Cancel 3 Click the 7 lor button top Moves the selected statement note upward Bottom Moves the selected statement or note downward APPENDIX INDEX GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES Editing examples Move Step 60 upward in unit of row Statement Note Batch Edit Line Statement Statement I Statement Mote L 7 Line Statement ot Control 21525651 2 Preparation mr
36. Displaying instructions labels in inline structured text When displaying instructions labels in the inline structured text the following options must be set Select Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt ST gt Instruction label name prediction For details of displaying instructions labels refer to Section 6 2 1 Displaying inline structured text program in list form The compiled inline structured text program can be displayed in a list form Select an inline structured text box to be displayed and select View gt Display Compile Result Compile Result Instance Name MAIN tep Compile Result LD 5 400 CJ P2048 LD 5 401 OUT M8191 JMP P2049 P2048 LD 5 400 MOV D2 D1 LD 5 400 MOV D4 D2 LDI M2 CJ P2050 LD 5M400 MOV D8 D6 P2050 mE P2049 The compilation result is not displayed when the compilation target is an assignment command in which the source data and the target data are the same Example in ST language MO M0 un Cn R we ma Update Close 6 28 6 4 3 Editing inline structured text program 6 4 Using Inline Structured Text 6 4 4 Deleting inline structured text box Delete an inline structured text box Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Select an inline structured text box to be deleted PRG Write MAIN 25 Step lt GO X zZ 56 NO 2 n Eu 2 Select Edit Delete or press the Delete key
37. END PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS Create a wrapping destination symbol gt Create a wrapping source symbol gt EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS Enter the instruction in the row 2 x10 x20 X30 0 _ _ ___ SET 0 T o 0 2 og SET M1 26 KO 2 KD ECALL abedefghijklmnopqrstuves P1000 2 111111 ZR222222 28333333 28444444 2 555555 2 lt LU IO O lt Cn 0 X GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 2 If wrapping occurs due to the insertion of a contact the first column contact cannot be inserted In this case move the instruction to the next row and insert the contact in the first column after connecting the contact with the wrapping symbols Example A contact can not be inserted in the first column since there is no space in the row ll Move the instruction to the next row 16 END Create a wrapping destination symbol gt Create wrapping source symbol gt Y 16 END Insert a contact 6 14 Precautions on Editing Ladders 3 When there are two or more wrapping rows an instruction that causes more wrapping can not be created In this case insert a new row below the existing rows and enter the instruction in that row Then adjust the wrapping symbol numbers Example To enter the following instruction ECALL abcdefg P1000 ZR1000000 ZR1000001 ZR1000002 ZR10000
38. FX1s FX1N Fundamentals Common Applied Application Fxoy Fx FXaN FXiNc LESE FXu FX2c 2 Learning the types and details Using of 2 mmu CENE application ladder instructions Details language descriptions of devices and parameters Learning details of specifications su Oke functions and instructions of SFC Learning the fundamentals for creating a structured program eee Details Details language Learning the Using descriptions of devices structured parameters and ladder FBD error codes Oot Learning the language types and details of sequence instructions Learning the types and details of application instructions 17 How to read this manual 2 2 Ladder Editor 2 2 Ladder Editor This section explains the screen display of the GX Works2 ladder editor and its basic operations Supported CPU 2 2 1 Editing screen NG OVERVIEW Supported programmable z controller CPUs are shown in 2 icons under the section The following explains the editing screen used for creating ladders 28 Screen display 55 Fora project without labels 3 Screen display Select Project view gt POU gt Program gt program For a project with labels o Describes the screen display Select Project view gt POU gt Program gt program gt Program Ev Ed p
39. Function and SUB1 block 2 Device label automatic assign setting Devices in the range set on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting screen automatically assigned devices cannot be used in the program If automatically assigned devices are used in a program a compilation error occurs For the device label automatic assign setting gt Section 5 7 Input arguments of function block Data cannot be written to input arguments VAR INPUT of function block If data are written to input arguments a compilation error occurs 10 16 10 3 3 Precautions on compilation 10 3 Compilation Step numbers of label program Each step number of the label program is enclosed in parenthesis Step numbers may increase decrease when the program is compiled Step numbers actually written to a programmable controller CPU are step numbers displayed in the device display When writing the program to programmable controller CPU check the step numbers by displaying devices after the compilation ouo 2 zi zz zo Ok LL Oz Z KEE Gar 2 10 lt Label display gt f PRG MAIN Output enable PB2 Output_enable CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE fe Moy Set value Storage register D Convert READY HENI PROGRAMS Head KO Storage register K1 Storage register Analog value Step numbers of label program lt G lt L
40. GX Works2 11 WRITING READING DATA TO FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU MEMO 11 6 aN MELSOFT J Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES 12 MONITORING This chapter explains how to monitor the program execution status of the programmable controller CPU using the program editor 9 gt For the overview of monitoring refer to the following manual gt 5 Ls GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Qoa 11 dm 12 12 1 Starting and Stopping Monitoring of Programs 12 2 12 2 Starting and Stopping Monitoring of Function Blocks 12 3 12 3 Changing Operating Conditions of Monitoring 12 4 9 12 4 Monitoring Ladder 12 7 12 5 Monitoring SFC Programs 12 8 5 CD 2 O D O O lt LLI APPENDIX INDEX 12 1 GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12 1 Starting and Stopping Monitoring of Programs This section explains how to monitor program Open the program editor to be monitored in advance Starting monitoring of programs Start monitoring of the program Operating procedure Select Online gt Monitor gt Start Monitoring 28 The monitoring starts Stopping monitoring of programs Stop monitoring of the program Operating procedure Select Online gt Monitor gt Stop Monitoring 8 The monitoring sto
41. ST program at the coil instruction area on the ladder editor of the project with labels With this function a numeric value operation or a character string process can be easily created in the ladder program Check the Enable function block call from ladder to ST and from ST to ladder item under Tool gt Options gt Compile gt Basic Setting to use the Inline structured text function For precautions on using the Inline structured text function refer to Section 6 4 5 lt Using ladder gt lt Using Inline structured text gt 0 0 AddData PRG Write MAIN2 49 Step x10 4 AddData AddData AddData AddData AddData AddData Inline structured text box STB AddData AddData AddData AddData AddData AddData 6 26 6 4 1 Feature of Inline structured text 6 4 Using Inline Structured Text 6 4 2 Inserting inline structured text box Insert an inline structured text box on the ladder editor Operating procedure OVERVIEW Select Edit gt Inline Structured Text gt Insert Inline Structured Text Box sa i z An inline structured text box is inserted c 2 PRG Write MAIN 1 Step H CD 9 5 5 eo CD gt 25 c Oo re AG Point Inserting an inline structured text box An inline structured text box can be also inserted by entering
42. TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS 2 Select Online gt Read from PLC 2 The Online Data Operation screen is displayed The Read from PLC function 7 Section 11 1 3 Check the Merge Peripheral Statement Note item under Option on the Program Detail Setting screen and execute the Read from PLC function lt x Q T LLI ae c Program Detail Setting Allocate Memory Far Online Change AIN MONITORING Option Allocate Memory For Online Change Allocate Memory for Onine Change Reading Left Capacity at the Same Time CD 2 O DL O O lt LLI 4 Confirm if the statements and or notes of the read sequence program are entered at the correct positions APPENDIX Point When statement or note is not entered at the correct position Correct the statement and note positions by the statement note batch editing function if the statement or note is not entered at the correct position after performing the merge process Section 9 3 INDEX 9 7 2 Performing merge process 9 29 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES 9 8 Editing SFC Comments This section explains how to create and edit SFC comments SFC comment is a generic term for SFC step comments that are appended to SFC steps and transition comments that are appended to transitions in the created SFC diagr
43. c ac CONTROLLER CPU lt Device display gt PRG MAIN Read Only JER M8190 M8190 MOV D12287 012286 M8188 TO 012285 KO D12286 1 BCD 012286 012284 END 1 Step numbers of sequence program CD 2 O D O O lt INDEX APPENDIX gt 10 3 3 Precautions on compilation 10 17 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 4 Checking for Errors and Warnings When the program check or the compilation is executed the target programs and label settings are checked and the results are displayed in the Output window The following explains the checking method for errors displayed in the Output window Screen display Outout x fx Rebuild All 2 7 Data Class Error Code MAINI Program compile switch has not been defined Error Warning list SUB1 Program compile Wrong Label device type Function type Status Errer 2 Warning 0 Checkwaming 0 Display contents Item Description Function type Display the name of the executed function Error warning list Display the check results Display Error or Warning Display Check Warning for the duplicated coil check ladder check consistency check warnings Result Data Name Display project names with errors and warnings Class Display check types such
44. 00 00 6 33 Emtenng NOTOS ee 9 9 Entering P statements and I statements 9 5 F FAN PUISE avvek 6 6 Falling Pulse Branch rrrarerrnnnnvnnnnnvrnnnnevnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnne 6 6 Falling Pulse Close 6 6 Falling Pulse Close Branch 6 6 4 3 instance name pp 6 19 Find Jump Step 8 7 function block label setting 6 18 function block selection window 2 2 6 18 6 24 FXGP DOS 12 6 EXGPMIN mase 12 6 G SX Developer Hare A 21 GNOME A 21 GX Works2 Beginner s Manual Simple Project A 12 GX Works2 Beginner s Manual Structured Project A 12 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common A 12 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project uus E 12 High Performance Model QCPU _ A 21 hold Step TS 12 8 Horizontal 6 32 1 ES EE E RT 9 3 IMAGING STEP c 12 8 Inline structured text 6 26 inline structured text box 6 27 Input FB Instance Name screen 6 19 Input ladder parts ape 6 24
45. 13 SETTING OPTIONS This chapter explains the functions of options for setting screen display format or detailed operations of each function CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING PROGRAMS lt x Q T LLI ae c CONTROLLER CPU 13 1 Basic 13 2 13 2 Option Setting 13 3 MONITORING EN QJ o 2 ou o z o APPENDIX INDEX 13 1 GX Works2 13 SETTING OPTIONS 13 1 Basic Operations This section explains how to set options Screen display Select Tool gt Options Options Unset Project Language Setting Sutomatically change language according to system Change History H Program Editor Device Comment Editor Label Setting Editor Parameter i Monitor PLC Read Write Online Change Symbolic Information tl Compile H Intelligent Function Module iQ Works Interaction Explanation System Label Setting Back to System Default Back to User Default Set as User Default Cancel Operating procedure Set the items on the screen When the cursor is placed setting item an explanation of the item is displayed on the Explanation field Details of the setting items gt Section 13 2 Screen button Back to System Default Restores the initial settings
46. Displaying statements on the editing screen Display hide of statements can be switched by selecting View gt Statement 03 Section 2 2 4 0 6 9 2 2 Entering statements 9 2 Editing Statements and Notes Modifying and deleting statements Modify and delete statements Modifying statements Modify a statement Operating procedure Select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement lt The statement entry mode is established Move the cursor to the statement to be modified Press the key For line statements the Enter Line Statement screen is displayed For and I statements the Enter P I Statement screen is displayed Change the type and or modify the Enter Line Statement statement Auto IF In Peripheral j Display in Navigation Window Click the button The modified statement is displayed on the editing screen To disable the statement entry mode select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement 3 again The statement entry mode is disabled 9 2 3 Modifying and deleting statements CONVERTING EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES o TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS lt x D zZ Q T LLI ac 22 MONITORING SETTING OPTIONS APPENDIX INDEX GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES Point Statements be modified on the Enter Symbol screen Mov
47. Fe at the cursor position Section 7 3 2 BS Block Start Step without END Check Insert sre amp at the cursor position D Selection Divergence Section 7 3 4 D Simultaneous Divergence Section 7 3 5 C Selection Convergence Section 7 3 6 C Simultaneous Convergence Section 7 3 7 PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 1 3 3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams 1 17 GX Works2 OVERVIEW 1 1 18 Edit function for editing SFC diagrams Sort the SFC step transition numbers in ascending le descending order Documentation SFC Step Transition Comment Change to the SFC step transition comment editing mode Find Replace function for editing SFC diagrams Jump Move the cursor to the specified position Find Jump Step Change SFC Step No Move to the jump source step Replace the SFC step number View function for editing SFC diagrams Program Display Display MELSAP L programs SFC Step Transition Comment Display the SFC step transition comments Zoom SFC Row Setting Open SFC Blocklist Change the display magnification ratio of the SFC diagram Set the number of rows of SFC diagram Display the SFC block list screen MELSAP3 Display Display SFC in MELSAP3 format MELSAP L Instruction Format Display Display SFC in MELASP L instruction form
48. Replace the start module I O number of the buffer memory Section 8 1 3 lt address instruction Switch Statement Note Change the type PLC Peripheral of a statement note Section 9 4 H Line Statement List Display a list of line statements used in the program Section 9 6 7 Jump Move the cursor to the specified step position Section 8 1 2 Jump to Next Ladder Block Start Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the next ladder block Move th from th t position to the start of th pr Jump io Previous Ladder Block Start ove the cursor from the current position to the start of the previous ladder block EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt I O c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 1 3 2 List of functions for editing in ladder language 1 15 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW View function for editing in ladder language Reference Comment Display device comments Statement Display statements Section 2 2 4 Note Display notes Open the Options screen and display hide the lines of Display Lines of Monitored Current Value Section 2 2 5 monitored current value Display Format for Device Comment ine DUIS screen display Jormal tor Section 2 2 6 device comment Non Display Ladder Block Hide a ladder block at the cursor position Display Ladder Block Display a hidden ladder block at the cursor position Section 2 2 9 Non Display All Ladder Block H
49. Screen display PRG Write MAIN 109 Step Line statement Auto Operation CALL PO Statement Operation Preparation Confirm Not perauon Freparaton conirm ote displayed on gt x3 a tree A Y20 v70 X10 x11 x12 30 Y71 TO x5 P statement initial Process PO SM400 60 7 statement Count the number of interrupt occurrences 0 2 9 2 1 Statements and notes 9 2 Editing Statements and Notes B What is statement statement is comment that is appended to a ladder block Appending statements makes the processing flow easy to understand Statements include line statements P statements and I statements A line statement be displayed tree view of the Navigation window For details of the line statements displayed on a tree view gt Section 9 5 Line statement A comment appended to a ladder block as a whole e P statement A comment appended to a pointer number e statement A comment appended to an interrupt pointer number B Whatis a note A note is a comment that is appended to a coil and application instruction Appending notes makes the details of coils and application instructions easy to understand B Number of characters that can be entered STATEMENTS NOTES a H O o lt CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU
50. Set a skip range or cancel the set skip range Enable disable the skip range at the cursor position Cancel all skip ranges Skip Range Window Display the Skip Range window Diagnostics common function Diagnose the operating status of the programmable MELSECNET Diagnostics Diagnose MELSECNET 10 H CC Link Diagnostics Diagnose CC Link and CC Link LT Monitor the system status of the programmable controller CPU Online Module Change Change modules online System Monitor 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project Reference Common Common Common Reference Common 1 3 List of Functions Tool common function IC Memory Card Read IC Memory Card Read data from the IC memory card Write IC Memory Card Write data to the IC memory card Check programs of the project without labels and display Check Program Sors Check Parameter Check parameters and display errors Options Set various options Key Customize Change the settings of the shortcut keys Device Label Automatic Assign Setting Set device range to be automatically assigned to a label Block Password Set a block password to data Calculate the size of files to be written to the programmable Confirm Memory Size controller CPU Set TEL Data Connect via Modem Register a modem between a personal computer and a serial communication module or a personal computer and AT Command Registration an FXC
51. e Ow 9 contacts 2 contacts 1 coil 11 contacts 3 contacts 1 coil 8 13 contacts 4 contacts 1 coil 17 contacts 6 contacts 1 coil 21 contacts 8 contacts 1 coil E lt TO 25 N X 6 3 3 Creating input and output ladder parts of function blocks 6 21 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 3 4 Changing FB instance names of pasted function blocks Change the FB instance name of the pasted function block Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the function block whose FB instance name is to be changed FB instance name 2 Select Edit gt Edit FB Instance The Edit FB Instance Name screen is displayed The current FB instance name is displayed in the entry field Edit FB Instance Name Eco i 1 3 Enter a new FB instance name Edit FB Instance Name PraductQuantity 4 Click the gt button The function block is displayed on the editing screen with the changed FB instance name PLUS2 W H D200 52 instance name 5 Define an FB instance name to the global label or local label fs Local Label Setting MAIN PRG Class Label Name Data Type H A LJ NERE sm 2 Bl ProduciQuantiy A Point Changing FB instance of the same name When the same FB instance name is set to the FB instances created from the same function block changing one of the FB instance name causes to change
52. iene Stop monitoring the window being Alt Stop Monitoring ee EE Emo Batch monitor device buffer memories 1 3 Batch Monitor For ladder and SFC Zoom programs Common shift Enter Modify Value change the ON OFF and value of a device label used in a program F2 Convert compile the program being Section E 10 2 1 Convert compile a sequence program Shift FA Online Program Change and write it to the programmable Common O lt c O Z O DE gt SETTING OPTIONS controller CPU Shit Compile convert all programs in the Section Start Stop Simulation Start stop simulation Common APPENDIX INDEX Appendix 1 1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys App 3 GX Works2 APPENDIX Docking Window toolbar icons The following table shows the Docking Window toolbar icons boa Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Navigation Window Display hide the Navigation window Common Function Block Selection Display hide the Function Block Output Window Display hide the Output window Section 10 4 Display hide the Cross Reference Gross Reference Em Device List Display hide the Device List window Common Ed BE gt Display hide the Watch window Intelligent Function Module Display hide the Intelligent Function Monitor Module Monitor window Intelligent Intelligent Function Module Di
53. part such as FB or function on the window for Section 6 3 SETTING LABELS Function Block Selection Window utilizing it to a program Display hide the Output window Output Window In the Output window the conversion compilation result is Section 10 4 displayed Display hide the Cross Reference window Cross Reference In the Cross Reference window devices labels used in the project are displayed Display hide the Device List window Device List In the Device List window the usage of selected device is Common displayed Display hide the Watch window Watch 1 to 4 In the Watch window the monitoring result is displayed Intelligent Function Module Monitor Display hide the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window 1 to 10 Intelligent Intelligent Function Module Guidance 2 the Intelligent Function Module Guidance Display hide the Find Replace window Find Replace In the Find Replace window the search replace result is Common displayed Break Point Window Display hide the Break Point window Break Device Window Display hide the Break Device window Common Skip Range Window Display hide the Skip Range window EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt T c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 5 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW Online common function
54. 3 Number of convergences Q Enter SFC Symbol z D lt Q ES 55 X X na Cancel 0 3 Set the items on the screen 2 s Item Description lt 3 Symbol Select C Ss Number of convergences Enter a number of columns of convergence line Step Attribute This setting is not required 5 Block This setting is not required Comment This setting is not required 4 Click the button The entered simultaneous convergence symbol is displayed lt Overwrite mode gt SETTING LABELS Enter a simultaneous convergence EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Q 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 7 3 7 Entering simultaneous convergences 7 19 GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS Insert mode Enter a simultaneous convergence 7 20 7 3 7 Entering simultaneous convergences 7 3 Creating 5 Diagrams Point Entering method when a divergence and a convergence overlap in a single transition Reserve the area for one step using vertical line then enter divergence or symbol vertical line be inserted by selecting Edit gt Insert Row 2 gt Section 7 3 11 Inserting deleting rows and columns Example 1 OVERVIEW 2 70 lt gt 29 Area for 1 step cz OQ oo 2 2 x aa j 25 r 91 na
55. 6 3 2 Pasting function blocks to sequence programs 6 19 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 4 Click the _ button The function block is pasted on the editing screen PRG MAIN INCP D100 D200 kagg Point Pasting function blocks 6 20 The following methods can also be used to paste function blocks e Select a function block from the Project view and drag and drop it to the pasting position On the editing screen move the cursor to the pasting position and double click the function block on the Function Block Selection window On the editing screen move the cursor to the pasting position and select a function block on the Function Block Selection window and press the Enter key Display of pasted function blocks In the pasted function block label names of I O variables and their corresponding data types are displayed FB instance name Data type Data type Label name Label name PLUG 24 The following are the representation of data types e B Bit W Word signed D Double word signed E Single precision real e L Double precision real 5 String 6 3 2 Pasting function blocks to sequence programs 6 3 Using Function Blocks 6 3 3 Creating input and output ladder parts of function blocks Create input and output ladder parts of a function block OVERVIEW Z O z c 29 vz OO Input ladder part NO 3 O
56. APPENDIX gt 10 2 4 Changing operating conditions of compilation 10 9 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 3 Compilation By compilation operation the labels are assigned to devices and programs created in project with labels are converted to executable programs programmable controller CPU Checking the compilation status The compilation status can be checked in the Project view Items are displayed in red as shown below if the data are in uncompiled status Uncompiled data can be displayed in the Project view by right clicking on global label POU program file and selecting Open Uncompiled Data from the shortcut menu Uncompiled data status is displayed on the Project view Navigation Project b b 2 Ar 4 Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Global Label Global Program Setting POU B Program MAIN Items are displayed in red if the data are in uncompiled status aa Program Local Label 10 3 1 Compilation target data when compiling all programs 10 10 When compiling all programs compilation target data are determined according to the registration usage Status of data type The following table shows the compilation target data Compiled x Not compiled Registration usage status of Compilation target when Compilation target data type compilation target data type compiling all programs Regist
57. Define structured data types to be used in the label setting Section 5 6 1 amp Structure Setting Struct1 Laok Label Name Data Type Constant Comment STRUCT datat Word Signed Member STRUCTT data STRUCT 1_data3 STRUCT 1_data4 STRUCT 1_data5 WordlSigned 24177 Member pa Member Double Word Signed Member FLOAT Single Precision Member 5 2 Setting Global Labels 5 2 Setting Global Labels This section explains how to set global labels Global labels can be used in iQ Works supported products GX Works2 MT Developer2 GT Designer3 by registering them as system labels For details of system labels refer to the following manual 037 iQ Works Beginner s Manual OVERVIEW Point System labels Same label names can be used in programming among GX Works2 MT Developer2 and GT Designer3 by using system labels System label data base A system label data base is a data base to manage system labels A system label data base is created in the workspace when the workspace is saved in MELSOFT Navigator System labels cannot be used in the workspace which does not contain a system label data base SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE Screen display Select Project view gt Global Label gt global label is Global Label Setting Global1 aa Label Name Data Type Device Comment Remark Relation w
58. LLI or 22 2 Clickthe button after reading and understanding the precaution described on the message All programs are converted compiled and the result is displayed in the Output window By double clicking the result the corresponding error location in the program is displayed For checking errors warning refer to Section 10 4 i Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help LBB Ale E cae ew ER ER I SERT EE EE Tr i ee EAT ETIE EF EE i Navigation AX PRGIWrite MAIN 18 Step Local Label Setting MAIN PRG Project PB2 Dutput enable e MOV Set value Storage register E MONITORING 3 Bp 2146 dd Parameter DA Convert READY Intelligent Function Modul 1 TO Head No KO Storage register Program 17 END eres 8 Structured Data Types Local Device Comment D User Library ud Connection Destination CD 2 O D O O lt Rebuild All No Result Data Name Error MAIN 2 Error MAIN rot Class Local label check 4 label name has not been set Local label check data type has not been set Output window lt Error 2 Warming 0 CheckWarning 0 English Simple Q02 Q02H Host Station 0 18Step NL Point Assigning devices to
59. Navigation window Display contents of a project in tree format EE EE Display a list of functions such as function blocks used for Section 6 3 programming Output window Display compilation and check results errors and warnings Section 10 4 Cross Reference window Display cross reference results Device List window Display the device list Meer under iow screen used for monitoring and changing current device values GX Works2 Version 1 dd screen used for monitoring intelligent function modules ea Monitor 1 to 10 9 9 Common ER A screen used for searching and replacing character strings in the project Status bar Display information about a project being edited 2 2 Ladder Editor 2 2 Ladder Editor This section explains the screen display of the GX Works2 ladder editor and its basic operations 2 2 1 Editing screen NG OVERVIEW 2 moat 2 x The following explains the editing screen used for creating ladders 29 c 2 Screen display 55 For a project without labels 3 Select Project view gt POU gt Program gt program For a project with labels lt Select Project view gt POU gt Program gt program gt Program D lt a Title bar 8 5 2 veData 00 01 02 03 D4 05 06 07 08 09 0104011 012 012 St Inline KA structured 2 2 5 re MO END Ii 25 in
60. Please set the information of the new label to be registered Label Mame Unit Label Setting Information Class Data Type PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Constant Comment oa SETTING LABELS 3 Set the items on the screen Set the data type on the Data Type Selection screen by clicking Data Type lt Section 5 5 3 Direct data entry is also possible Item Description Label Name Display the label name entered on the Ladder Symbol screen Select label setting editor name to be registered from the list displayed by a Label Setting Information o clicking zl T a ZO Class Select a label class from the list displayed by clicking l 5 Ox Display the constant value of the selected data type Constant When VAR GLOBAL CONSTANT is selected for Class and simple type is selected for Data the constant value be set 7 2 9 Enter label comments 2 4 Switch display hide label comments to display the label comments on the program EG Comment editor lt Section 2 2 4 9 1 Anew line can be inserted in a cell by pressing the Ctrl keys a 4 Clickthe button lt LO The undefined label is registered to the label setting editor 25 N X 6 2 1 Entering contacts coils and application instructions 6 9 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Point Entering con
61. Precautions on editing in inline structured text box A maximum number of characters that can be entered is 2048 However two characters are used as the line feed 23 local labels can be used in an inline structured text box Excluding constants The following data type labels cannot be used Counter e Timer Retentive timer Pointer Structure Array e Function block By setting the option lower case device names can be used as labels only for device names which are out of the range set on the lt lt Device gt gt tab of PLC parameters Instructions cannot be entered using the Function Block Selection window The editing status cannot be recovered to the previous status by the operation such as selecting Edit gt Undo e Word device indirect specification DO cannot be executed 3 Copying inline structured text box When copying an inline structured text box select a ladder block including the left side of the left power rail Contacts of a ladder block containing an inline structured text box only or an inline structured text box only cannot be copied A ladder block containing an unconverted inline structured text box also cannot be copied Copy a ladder block after converting the program 2 gt Chapter 10 4 Re pasting after deleting inline structured text box 1 When compiling with re pasting the data which existed in the deleted inline structured text box the compile result will not b
62. Serial Communication Module Predefined Protocol Support Function Start the predefined protocol support function Language Selection Select language used in project 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project Reference Common Section 10 1 4 Common Chapter 13 Common Section 5 7 Common Common Common Common Intelligent Common OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt lt D 9 O 2 A PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt T c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW Window common function Reference Cascade Tile windows in overlapping display Tile Vertically Tile windows vertically Tile Horizontally Tile windows horizontally Arrange Icons Arrange the icons at the bottom of the window Common Close All Close all open windows Switch to other window Display the open window Window Display a list of open windows Also open or arrange specified windows Help common function Reference GX Works2 Help Display the GX Works2 Help screen Common Operating Manual GX Works2 Beginner s Manual Simple Project GX Works2 Beginner s Manual Structured Project Operating Manual Common Display the operating manuals Operating Manual Simple Pro
63. T LLI or 22 OFF XO Displays current value of word device INC 01 MONITORING Point ON OFF status display During monitoring the ON OFF status of bit device is displayed as oy E AE shown on the right 4 V i 54 Only comparison instructions that equivalent to contacts and aA aC gt SET RST PLS PLF SFT SFTP FF DELTA DELTAP instructions that are equivalent to coils are supported Word device monitor values When the current value is a large value is appended to the value as shown below to omit the following numbers The omitted numbers can be checked by any of the following operations Place the cursor on the monitor value and display the tool hint CD 2 O D O O lt e Select View Zoom x Z e Select View gt Text Size gt Smaller Hold the Ctr key and rotate the mouse middle scroll button B backward z piNC DO 21159263 Monitor display at use of master control instructions In GX Works2 the set reset status of a master control is not displayed on a left power rail of a ladder program during monitoring x It is displayed on a title bar of a tab ul 2 Set reset status of a master control 12 7 GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12 5 Monitoring SFC Programs This section explains how to monitor SFC diagrams an
64. gt Transition number Enter SFC Symbol lt MELSAP L instruction format gt Transition number Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program Symbol TR Program lt MELSAP L start conditions format gt Transition number Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program Symbol Comment Device Label that will be transition condition for next step ON Por ON ON m Above Device Label Combination AND Condition Label Candidacy Display Target Data locdlabel Blak tsi Program Conversion Cancel 7 3 3 Entering series transitions 7 13 OVERVIEW SCREEN Gd CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Q 2 lt c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 3 Set the items on the screen Item Description Symbol Select TR Transition number Enter a transition number Step Attribute This setting is not required Block This setting is not required Comment Enter transition comments Up to 32 characters can be entered Enter programs Program 2 For entering MELSAP L programs refer to the following section lt Section 7 9 1 Not supported by FXCPU 2 Applicable to MELSAP L instruction format and MELSAP L start conditions format 4 Click button The entere
65. gt Step Dummy Transition Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program Symbol STEP Step Attribute Comment Program Device Label to turn ON in activating step 10 Device label specification Label Candidacy Display Target Data Local Label Block Conversion Cancel Operating procedure 1 Setthe items on the screen Item Description Program Enter items for an operation output or transition condition program Operation output Enter devices labels Transition condition Set devices labels and ON OFF Device label specification Above Device Label Combination Label Candidacy Display Select the corresponding data of label options displayed for device label Target Data specification Execute online change after Select AND or OR for each condition mM Select this to execute the Online program change on the changed program converting 1 This item cannot be selected after compiling all programs For details refer to the Point in this section For precautions when compiling all programs refer to Section 10 3 3 2 Click the button The program is converted and reflected to the SFC diagram Point Execute online change after converting check box When the check box of Execute online change after converting is disabled after compiling all programs select Online gt Write to PLC and write programs to the programmable
66. item Description Select the item s for checking the program MONITORING the subroutine program Check item Description pene Check if the instruction can be used for the CPU type of the project being edited S Ladder Check Check if the ladder is created properly O Check Consistency pair Check the program consistency for such case as NO pointer at the jump destination or no RET instruction Check N Duplicated Coil Check Check the duplicated coils Check if the device being used is within the range set Device Check in the parameter Check Target Target the Whole Program Select this to check all programs in the project Target the Current Program Select this to check only the program being displayed SFC Check Data Select this to check the SFC block list that includes the SFC blocks being displayed Current Block Select this to check only SFC blocks being displayed 1 Not supported by FXCPU Target All Blocks INDEX APPENDIX gt 10 1 4 Checking programs 10 Er GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS 2 Click the button The program is checked and the result is displayed in the Output window By double clicking the result the corresponding error location in the program is displayed For checking errors refer to Section 10 4 Check Program 10 4 10 1 4 Checking programs 10 2 For Projects with Labels 10 2 For Projects with
67. nnne nnne nnne n nnns 7 22 7 3 9 SL EEE 7 23 7 3 10 Drawing lines RETE 7 24 7 3 11 Inserting deleting rows and 7 25 7 4 Deleting SFC Diagrams 7 27 7 4 1 Deleting SFC symbols by setting a range pp 7 27 7 4 2 Deleting only divergence convergence vertical 7 28 7 5 Changing SFC Step Attributes 7 29 7 6 Cutting copying and pasting SFC diagrams 7 30 7 7 Sorting SFC Step Transition Numbers of SFC Diagram 7 32 7 8 Redisplaying SFC Diagrams 7 33 7 9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions 7 34 7 9 1 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP3 FXCPU 7 34 7 9 2 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP L instruction format 7 36 7 9 3 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP L start conditions format 7 39 7 10 Setting Block Information 7 41 7 11 Displaying SFC Block List 7 42 7 11 1 Displaying comments SFC block list pp 7 43 7 11 2 Displaying devices SFC block 1ist 4 7 43 7 11 3 Displaying SFC diagram from SFC block 1 66 80400 n 7 44 7 11 4 Displaying Local Label Setting screen from SFC block 7 44 7 12 Setting Parameters for SFC Programs 7 45 7 12 1 SFC settings in PLC 00 0000011
68. selected 1 Click Detail Setting on the label setting screen The Structure Device Setting screen is displayed 2 Enter the device name to the Device column Series of devices are automatically set in the cells following the one entered skipping the cells where devices are already set When using bit specification Label Data Type STRUCTT datal W ard Signed STRULCTI datas FLOAT Single Precision v Label Data Type STRUCT 1_datal Word Signed STRUCTT data Word Signed STRUCT1_datas DEM Automatically STRUCT data4 Double Wford Signed set data STRUCTT datab FLOAT Single Precision When not using bit specification Label Name Data Type Device STRUCT 1_datal Word Signed pil STRUCTT data ord Signed STRUCT1 data3 BE STRUCT1_data4 Double Word Signed STRUCTT datab FLOAT Single Precision Y Data Type Label Mame STRUCT datal Word Signed STRUCTT data Word Signed STRUCT 1_data3 Automatically STRUCT 1_datat Double Word Signed set data STRUCT 1_dataS FLOAT Single Precision Point When not using bit specification When the bit specification is not used uncheck the Use Bit Designation item on the Structure Device Setting screen 5 22 5 6 3 Assigning devices to structured data type labels 5 6 Setting Structured Data Labels 5 6 4 Assigning devices to structure array type labels Set devices for structur
69. 04 004 OFF vl _ Above Device Label Combination AND Condition Label Candidacy Display Target Data Local Label Block Execute online change after converting AW m Program Device Label that will be transition condition For next step Tran00l on v 002 OFF m TranO02 003 Jon 004 orr m Tran003 Above Device Label Combination Condition X Label Candidacy Display Target Data Local Label Block 004 Execute online change after converting CW Tran 7 40 7 9 3 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP L start conditions format 7 10 Setting Block Information 7 10 Setting Block Information This section explains how to set block information Block information is set on the Property screen of SFC block Select the SFC block to be set in the Project view in advance OVERVIEW Screen display z E P i lt Select Project gt Object gt Property gt lt lt Details gt gt 2 O lt QCPU Q mode LCPU gt lt FXCPU gt OO Property Property NO Details Comment Comment 3 Data Name Block Tie sCHokTHe Data Name Black O Block o Title SFC Block Title 2 Block Information Block No 0 Block START END Bit T OO Step Transition Bit Block Type SFC Block 2 2 Block PAUSE RESTART Bit
70. 2 7 Setting number of contacts to be displayed in ladder programs 2 9 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 2 8 Switching display between label names and devices Switch the display of a program that uses labels between label name display and device display If label comments or device comments are set the corresponding comments are displayed Devices assigned by the compilation can be checked by switching the program display from label name display to device display For FXCPU when block password with the validated setting for Read protect the execution program exists the device display cannot be executed Operating procedure Select View gt Device Display F Example Label name display Device display Local la gt bel comm ent Start B Global I Device abel com ommernt ment Point Displaying hiding label comments and device comments To check the set label comments and device comments set the setting to display comments gt Section 2 2 4 Changing display of all program editors to device display in batch Change the display of all currently opened program editors to the device display Operating procedure Select View gt All Device Display The display of all currently opened program editors except for ST is changed to the device display Canceling device display of all program editors Cancel the device display of all currently opened progra
71. 55 One ladder block containing the inline structured text box is deleted 5 2 c PRG Write MAIN 25 Step Aa CD 2 H lt 2 co T MO Range selection when deleting an inline structured text box When deleting a ladder block containing a inline structured text box include the left side of the left power rail If this area is not selected a ladder block cannot be deleted PRG Write MAIN 25 Step ep SETTING LABELS Can be deleted EDITING LADDER zN PROGRAMS T PRG Write MAIN 25 Step EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Cannot be deleted Q 2 lt c lt LLI 0o REPLACE 6 4 4 Deleting inline structured text box 6 29 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 4 5 Precautions on using Inline structured text function The following explains the precautions on using the Inline structured text function 1 Precautions on creating ladder programs One inline structured text box can be created for one ladder block An FB and an inline structured text box cannot be used both in a ladder block When the creation of an inline structured text box is attempted at the contact instruction area an inline structured text box is created at the coil instruction area A ladder program cannot be edited if the ladder block including an unconverted inline structured text program exists on the ladder editor Edit a program after converting it 2
72. Area for 1 step PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Number of divergences convergences when entering divergence convergence lines By entering n for the number of divergences convergences divergence convergence lines can be created from right to left without changing the cursor position Inserting divergences convergences Inserting divergences convergences may cause the SFC diagram to become a program that cannot be converted because of the combination of divergence and convergence Edit the SFC diagram to be normal and convert the program The following SFC diagram cannot be converted because of the combination of simultaneous divergence and selection convergence SETTING LABELS 1 2 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC 5 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 7 3 7 Entering simultaneous convergences 7 21 GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 3 8 Entering jump transitions L Enter a jump transition Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where a jump transition is entered 2 Select Edit gt SFC Symbol gt Jump The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen is displayed in accordance with the display format setting lt MELSAP3 FXCPU gt Jump destination step number Enter SFC Symbol F3 Cancel 3 Set the items on the screen Item Description Symbol Select
73. Assigning devices 10 3 Compilation Assigning to temporary variable automatically assigned device to other than label For details of device assignment to temporary variable and precautions when inline structured text or ST is used refer to the following GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project 9 o 2 zi zz S Ok LL Oz Z KEE Gar 2 10 Checking points of the empty automatically assigned device The usage of devices within the range set on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting can be checked by searching devices within the automatically assigned device range with the Device List CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE Te CONTROLLER CPU HENI PROGRAMS Example When 4000 to 8191 of D device are set on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting search D4000 to D8191 with the Device List The range of number of empty device points is the devices before the device numbers being used among D4000 to 08191 For example if D5000 is used D4000 to D4999 are the number of empty device points within the range set on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting lt x Q T LLI ae c For details of Device List refer to the following manual lt Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common MONITORING s CD 2 O D O O lt LLI INDEX APPENDIX gt 10 3 2 Assigning de
74. Autostart Block 0 Output Mode When the Block is Stopped Turn OFF C Keep ON PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS Print Window Print Window Preview Acknowledge XY Assignment Default he Cancel Operating procedure EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS e Set the items on the screen Item Description SFC Program Start Mode Select to initial start or resume start the SFC program Start Conditions Select whether to autostart block 0 at the initial start of the SFC program LL n Output Mode When the Block is Select to stop the program by turning OFF the coll outputs that are turned ON by lt the OUT instruction or to stop the program while they remained ON when the Zo Stopped a stop operation is requested to each block Q lt TO 25 N X 7 12 1 SFC settings in PLC parameter 7 45 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 12 2 Setting the property of SFC programs Set the property of SFC programs Screen display Select Project gt Object gt Property The following is a screen of High Performance model QCPU Details Comment Data Mame MAINI Title SFC Program Title SFC Program Type Setting C Control SFC type Periodic Execution Block Top of Block Number Interval Act at Block Multi Activated Stop Blocks Act at Step Multi Activated Waiting Blocks Stop Blocks Explanation Last Change 3 17 20
75. CONFIGURATIONS 4 Click the Details button Detail Instruction Help The Detail Instruction Help screen is ETE Usable Device displayed EBERT EHE Input Device Data Type 5 3 T 0 Tr i EX ES E Eh ed ea a Set the items the screen ECE SEBS 3 Item Description Pulse Form Check this item to convert the Explanation m onverts ata 0 to at device designate ata and stores at the device designate 42 instruction into pulse ed BCD data 0 to 9999 at d designated by 5 to BIM dat d st t the d designated Enter devices 6 Input Indication of the symbols Device Applicable Return Browse Manual Cancel Not applicable 6 Clickthe button on the Detail Instruction Help screen The instruction is entered at the cursor position EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 2 2 Instruction help 6 11 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Point Instruction help function The Instruction help function has the Instruction Selection and Find Instruction tabs The Instruction Selection tab is displayed when no instruction is entered in the device instruction entry field of the Enter Symbol screen and the Find Instruction tab is displayed when an instruction is entered in the instruction device entry field Instruction retrieval function If the ins
76. Display either SFC Block or Ladder Block Block Start Display Block START END Bit set on the Property screen of SFC block Step Transition Display Step Transition Bit set on the Property screen of SFC block Block PAUSE RESTART Display Block PAUSE RESTART Bit set on the Property screen of SFC block Pause Mode Display Pause Mode Bit set on the Property screen of SFC block Number of Active Steps 2 Display Number of Active Steps Register set on the Property screen of SFC block Continuous Transition Bit Display Continuous Transition Bit set on the Property screen of SFC block Comment Display Comment set on the Property screen of SFC block 1 Not supported by QCPU Q mode LCPU 2 Not supported by FXCPU 7 11 Displaying SFC Block List 7 11 1 Displaying comments on SFC block list mmm Display device label comments on the SFC block list Operating procedure Select View gt SFC Block List Comment OVERVIEW PRG MAIN2 Read Only SEE z DataName Block Start m Transition m CAUSE BESTARE Fe Mode Number of Active Steps Continuous Transition Bit Comment 0 Block First Process 0 Number of Active Steps 1 4 BlockO Comment Y MO Device Comment i Ds Device Comment ee Device Comment pe se a Device Comment L M4 Device Comment gt 3 Block1 Second Process M10 M13 Number_of_Active_Steps_2 Block Comment L D 0 Device na Device 2 Device C
77. INDEX APPENDIX gt OK Cancel 10 2 1 Converting compiling created programs 10 5 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS 2 Check the Execute compile after conversion item and click the button Programs are compiled simultaneously with the conversion and the result is displayed in the Output window By double clicking the result the corresponding error location in the program is displayed For checking errors warning refer to Section 10 4 MELSOFT Series GX Works2 OpeMan Simple OpemaniSimple E Workspace i10 6 PRG Write MAIN 18 Step DER i Project Edit Find Replace Compile Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window inge 1 5 EEE EGIL JER olt i g a a e si de da GTTEEET T EEE3S Navigation PRG Write M Local Label Setting MAIN PRG onver mment Output window English Simple Q02 Q02H Host Station O 18Step Point Build function Only the program being edited is converted when the Convert the selected program is selected on the Confirm Build Method screen The conversion operation is the same as the one for the project without labels 2 gt Section 10 1 1 When two or more changes are required in a program and if Execute compile after conversion is selected every time program is changed processing time is requir
78. Jump destination step number Description Display row numbers on the SFC diagram Display column numbers on the SFC diagram Display SFC step numbers for each step Display transition numbers for each transition Display start destination block numbers for the block start step Display reset destination step numbers for the reset step Display jump destination step numbers for the jump step Display comments for each SFC step Display comments for each transition Display MELSAP L programs 2 3 1 Editing screen Start destination block number Reset destination step number Transition comment SFC step number 2 3 SFC Editor NG OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 3 2 Changing display size of editing screen Change the display size of the editing screen Screen display Select View gt Zoom amp Zoom Magnification C 150 7 Specify ES Auto Columns Display contents Item Description 150 100 75 50 Change the display size according to the selected zoom ratio Specify Change the display size according to the specified zoom ratio Auto Change the display size according to the specified number of columns 2
79. LADDER PROGRAMS Change the wrapping symbol of amp to K5 Y With the corrections above correspondence between the wrapping source symbols and the wrapping destination symbols is secured 5 Acontact or a column cannot be inserted in the middle of an instruction statement If attempted the error message is displayed Example Neither a contact nor a column can be inserted in front of X1 and X2 since it cuts in the middle of the instruction above or K100 DO vo Series GX Works2 END Cannot edit in this position Likely causes are Line edit position is included on the way with the instruction position Line was inserted at the beginning of the program From by a line insert which occurred in repetition 6 14 Precautions Editing Ladders 6 When the ladder block is displayed in yellow it indicates that the ladder block cannot be displayed properly or an error exists in the program In this case perform the program check or compilation to check the error and correct the program Example XB 9 OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 15 Changi
80. Manual Application Functions Explains the application functions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming Sold separately Manual number Model code SH 080779ENG 13JU63 SH 080781ENG 13JU65 SH 080921ENG 13JU69 SH 080787ENG 13JZ22 SH 080788ENG 13JZ23 Manual number Model code SH 080782ENG 13JW06 SH 080783ENG 13JW07 SH 080784ENG 13JW08 SH 080785ENG 13JW09 JY997D26001 09R925 JY997D34701 09R926 JY997D34801 09R927 3 Operation of iQ Works Manual number Model code iQ Works Beginner s Manual Explains fundamental operation methods such as managing the system using MELSOFT Navigator and using system labels for users inexperienced with GX Works2 Sold separately SH 080902ENG 13JZ44 Point The Operating Manuals are included on the CD ROM of the software package in PDF file format Manuals in printed form are sold separately for single purchase Order a manual by quoting the manual number model code listed in the table above A 13 Installation Operation of GX Works2 14 Purpose of this manual This manual explains the operations for creating sequence programs in Simple project using the functions supported by GX Works2 Manuals for reference are listed in the following table according to their purpose For information such as the contents and number of each manual refer to the list of Related manuals 1 Operation
81. Monitor gt Start Monitoring 23 The monitoring starts For details of the monitoring refer to Section 12 4 12 12 12 5 3 Monitoring operation outputs transition conditions 12 5 Monitoring SFC Programs 12 5 4 Batch monitoring all blocks monitoring active steps Monitor the active inactive status of all blocks and step active inactive status of the specified block in the list display during the execution of the SFC program Batch monitoring all blocks Monitor the active inactive status of all blocks in the list display Operating procedure Select Online Monitor gt SFC All Block Batch Monitoring The SFC All Block Batch Monitoring screen is displayed 88 SFC All Block Batch Monitoring Block Ma 0 Data Name Block Stop Monitoring Active Step Monitor 12 13 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 um 126 127 128 4 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 19 35 236 237 238 23 60 261 B Active Block 222 Man Active Block Uncreated Black ele m R em T mn ca ce m ca mn ca r Pa Pt 2 BS 2 r3 TJ s 2 Pl fa Cc s 4 ez sl 4 Ps ra Display contents Item Description Block No Display the block number at the cursor position Data Name Display the data name of the block Title Display the title of the block Screen
82. Name Step Transition Set the jump destination of the SFC step number transition number Step No Select this to jump to the specified SFC step number Select this to jump to the specified transition number 2 Click the button The cursor jumps to the SFC step number transition number of the specified block 8 6 8 2 1 Jumping to specified 5 step number transition number on SFC diagram 8 2 Searching for Replacing Data in SFC Programs 8 2 2 Searching for jump with step number SFC diagram Search for a jump of jump source with specifying the step number of jump destination when the cursor is placed on a SFC diagram OVERVIEW Step number of Z jump destination rr lt 2 in OQ oo Jump 3 r 2 ra OO OO c c na Screen display Select Find Replace gt Find Jump Step Find Jump Step Ed Step number of jump destination Close Operating procedure PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 1 Entera step number of jump destination Item Description Enter the step number of jump destination Step number of jump destination Click to select from the 10 step numbers of jump destination entered previously SETTING LABELS 2 Click the button The cursor is moved to the jump of jump source 2 6 Point Ge Jump 7 Select Find Replace Find Jump Step to move the cursor to a jump of jump source wh
83. ON Actual Actual im S ORE input i OFF ON Actual Actual output OFF output OFF PLS MO PLS MO ON Display Display screen OFF screen OFF lt Monitor display for the PLF instruction gt GX Works2 format display FXGP DOS FXGP WIN format display Actual ON Actual ON dies X1 nd X1 OFF OFF Actual M1 i Actual 1 output OFF output OFF PLSMO ON PLSMO ON Display Display screen OFF screen OFF 12 6 12 3 3 Switching to FXGP DOS FXGP WIN display format FXCPU 12 4 Monitoring Ladder Programs 12 4 Monitoring Ladder Programs J Z LLI O lt LLI STATEMENTS NOTES This section explains how to monitor ladder program Open the program editor to be monitored in advance Operating procedure Select Online gt Monitor gt Start Monitoring 28 The monitoring starts MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Unset Project PRG Monitor Executing MAIN Read Only 13 Step CONVERTING ma TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING N CONTROLLER CPU I Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window yb 2 4 iD ES 2 36 nae a ER ER ERR EROS SAR es BRE ICA 1 100ms up Bix el Gee OW pee eee eee ee one PR il gM x EXECUUN PROGRAMS Displays ON OFF status of contact coil XQ lt x D zZ Q
84. Project Title Control 21525651 CP 33 12121 i XO Parameter Intelligent Function Module TitleJ utomatic operation program Global Device Comment By Global Label 16 21 Program Setting 8 POU x2 B Program 37 28 MAIN Title lnitial processing Control 21525651 Y70 X10 X11 x12 a atic onerakion nro ag Initial Select ag Count END 183 Local Label FB Pool Set reset Y75 Y72 User Library 67 Connection Destination We 79 Title Count the number of interrupt occurrences Navigation T PRG Write MAIN 97 Step Project TitleJ utomatic operation program f Ba 2 Ar Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Global Label 8 Program Setting Title lnitial processing POLI B Program 0 AT X12 1 T Y70 x1 23 o Y71 MAIN sk Program Y7 ag Automatic operation program Y72 ag Initial processing Count the number of interrupt occ 0 ag END Y73 Local Label FB Pool Structured Data Types Set reset Y75 Y71 Y72 51 ET s Y75 63 AST Y73 Title Count the number of interrupt occurrences 65 9 26 9 5 5 Deleting ladder blocks on tree view 9 6 Jumping from Line Statement List 9 6 Jumping from Line Statement List This section explains the function that displays line statements used in the ladder program and searches for
85. Shortcut Keys Appendix 1 5 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the verification result p eno Close the lt lt Detail Verify Result gt gt being Ctrl Delete Close Detail Result ert Al Detail Result J H Z LU gt 9 LU STATEMENTS NOTES CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS Close all Detail Verify Result gt gt Delete B BENE Write to CSV File Write verification result to a CSV file lt x Q T LLI oc c Appendix 1 6 Toolbar icons for executing sampling trace The following table shows the toolbar icons for executing sampling trace Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference nm 25 Trace Setting Display the Trace Setting screen Start sampling trace To start sampling Start Trace trace the trace ready signal SM800 1 3 must be Common MONITORING Se Stop Trace Stop sampling trace 2 Display Trace Buffer Display the Trace Data Storage Status ur Condition screen S Monitor Status Display the current sampling trace status Indicate the sampling trace stop status Execution Failed or the status sampling trace has not started Before Triaaer Indicate the status sampling trace is 99 execu
86. T C Setting Values For displaying setting values of timer and counter used in SFC programs and changing them in batch refer to the following section Section 6 15 Changing T C Setting Values aN MELSOFT 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE This chapter explains basic operations of search replace and batch replace functions OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SCREEN QJ 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE 8 1 Searching for and Replacing Data in Ladder Programs 8 2 8 2 Searching for and Replacing Data SFC Programs 8 6 PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC fee PROGRAMS O 2 lt u LO P LLI LLI N X GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 1 Searching for and Replacing Data in Ladder Programs This section explains how to search for and replace the specified device instruction and step number For the operations of device search replace instruction search replace and open closed contact change functions refer to the following manual gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 8 1 1 Searching for devices labels Search for a specified device label 1 Press the Space key on the program editor The Search screen is displayed Find Dol Instruction device entry field Ladder symbol selection field 2 Enter a device label to be searched Item Des
87. The same procedure as for creating a ladder can be used to edit a function block ladder Created function blocks are displayed in the Function Block Selection window and can be used as function blocks Selection nox Parts 24 Function Block 6 18 6 3 1 Creating function blocks 6 3 Using Function Blocks 6 3 2 Pasting function blocks to sequence programs Paste a function block to the sequence program Operating procedure 1 Select a function block from the Function Block Selection window and locate it to the pasting position using the drag and drop operation OVERVIEW The Input FB Instance Name screen is displayed 5 lt 4 b Selection n x c Parts RST M10 Function Block 5 Ej ADD 1 nO 3 TIA 2100 Drag and drop r D dn END X X 2 Select the registering destination of the function block to be pasted from the local label or global label Input FB Instance Mame PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Local Labe MAIN Global LabelfGlobali 3 Edit the FB instance name if necessary Input FB Instance Name ep SETTING LABELS The entered FB instance is automatically entered to the selected label EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS Local Label Setting MAIN PRG Class Label Data Type VAR Y 5DD 1 1 ADD 1 2 B 1 3 1 M LL 92 26 Ow a lt TO 2
88. View gt Comment Statement Note Point Displaying hiding comments Comments also can be displayed hidden on the Option screen displayed by the following operation Select View gt Display Format for Device Comment Comment Display Items Device Comment 172 Mote Statement 2 6 2 2 3 Changing text size on editing screen 2 2 5 2 2 Ladder Editor Displaying hiding lines of monitored current value Display hide the lines of monitored current value of word type variable Hide the lines of monitored current value to increase the ladder lines displayed on single screen and check more ladders compared to the status of displaying lines of monitored current value Display the dashed line areas line of monitored gt current value 5 413 Hide the dashed line 0 areas line of monitored current value The lines are closed up Operating procedure Moy KID Select View gt Display Lines of Monitored Current Value The Options screen is displayed Display Lines for Monitoring Current value Show Always 2 2 5 Displaying hiding lines of monitored current value DO TO KA NG OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02
89. Warning alarm for 5 secs Initial Process Trl 45 Cout Interruptions SM ADD 101 x15 118 Select Select Jump 9 3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes Move Step 60 upward in unit of ladder block Statement Note Batch Edit Line Statement Statement I Statement Mote RE i JD Control 21525651 FR REE ll operation Preparation ne Bir ee Line Statement Warning alarm Far 5 secs at Auto Operation SEar LIP BE mam amp 114 Jritil Process 7 131 Cout Interruptions None In PLC Statement Mote In Peripheral Statement Note Edit ee f In PLC t In Per Insert Roy f Line Lep Add Row Display 2 co Bottom Display in Navigation date Delete Fou Delete Row o Statement Note Batch Edit Line Statement Statement I Statement Mote X 1 Dylcontrol 21525651 Line Statement mi E Auto Operation Ha NN Warning alarm for 5 Secs at Aura Operation Star UP 4 60 Initial Process PERLE TUN Cout Interruptions dE 154 None In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note Edit Type Moye In PLE t In Per Insert Row Li LE Add Row Display Display in Navigation V Ladder Bottom Delete Row Find The unit of line statements one step above the selected statem
90. When Cut 56 is selected the ladder block in the set range is deleted 3 Move the cursor to the position where the cut or copied ladder block is pasted 6 50 6 11 3 Pasting cut or copied ladder block 4 Select Edit Paste The ladder block is pasted 6 11 Cutting Copying and Pasting Ladders 6 11 3 Pasting cut or copied ladder block 6 51 OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS ep SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE Er GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 7 The range can be set by pressing the shift keys gt x11 Y7 10 x11 8 8 Y71 BILI Pasting in the Insert mode The ladder block is inserted above the cursor position Cut or Copy 100 100 200 Paste If the ladders shown below are selected by setting a range the vertical line on the right side cannot be copied or pasted X100 X100 x2 00 0 1 mi gt The vertical line on the right side is not pasted In such a case set the range as shown below to copy or paste the ladders X100 X200 200 9 X300 X300 X100 x200 0 9 X300 6 52 6 11 3 Pasting cut or copied ladder block 6 12 Canceling Previous Opera
91. Y75 33 111 113 Program range which be displayed with line statements on tree view Double click a line statement on a tree view to jump to a ladder block where corresponding line statement is set The programs before the next line statement on a tree view are displayed by the jump function If there are no next line statements on a tree view the programs before the END instruction are displayed Double click Program under Project view gt POU gt Program gt program gt block gt Program of the Navigation window to display whole program Copying pasting line statements on tree view When copying or pasting the line statements on a tree view the ladder blocks from a line statement on a tree view in a ladder to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view are copied or pasted 9 5 1 Line statements on tree view 9 5 2 Display a line statement tree view of the Navigation window Operating procedure 2 3 4 9 9 5 Displaying Line Statements on Tree View Displaying line statements on tree view STATEMENTS NOTES a H O o lt Select Edit gt Documentation Statement 53 The statement entry mode is established 25 262 Le Move the cursor to a line statement to be displayed on a tree view uz 220 lt 585 52 SFR ogg Enter Line Statement
92. a single ladder conversion operation is 48 rows Perform ladder conversion appropriately during editing so that the number of ladder rows that has not been converted does not exceed over 48 rows Scrolling on the ladder editor When ladders that have not been converted exist the scroll on the ladder editor cannot be performed Convert ladders and then scroll with no unconverted ladders exist Wrapping a row A maximum number of contacts that can be created in a single row is 11 contacts 1 coil or 9 contacts 1 coil varies depending on the option setting If this limit is exceeded the wrapping source symbol gt and the wrapping destination symbol gt are automatically created and the ladder is wrapped The same numbers serial numbers are assigned to the wrapping source symbol gt and the wrapping destination symbol gt that are created in pairs Wrapping source symbol gt xi x2 x3 x4 x5 x7 x8 xg x10 x11 0 1 1 F amp F FF FF FF Fr FF Fe 25 x12 A 13 A14 x15 x16 1 A18 x19 x20 X2 Bi SS a ts a tt Wrapping destination symbol gt Changing the cursor position on the editing screen while the Enter Symbol screen is displayed Use the Ctrl keys to change the cursor position on the editing screen x10 x20 x30 x40 OUR 1 1 i veto s Leu Displaying the Instruction Help screen at the occurrence of lad
93. between the array elements as an offset value for the start device of the same data type 1 Click Detail Setting on the label setting screen The Structure Device Setting screen is displayed 2 Set the Structure Array Offset Value M Structure Array Offset value Word Device 10 Bit Device Use Bit Designation Ok Cancel 3 Set the device name for the start element data of the array Devices are set to the same data type of the array elements on the screen Offset value is not specified lt Array 0 gt Label Mame Data Type STRUCT 1_datal Word Signed E ERES datab FLOAT Single Precision D5 Y Data Type lt Array 1 gt Label Mame STRULCTIT datal Word Signed Devices starting STRUCTI_dataz Word Signed from D7 are STRUCTI dated bt 71 assigned STRUCTT data4 Double VWord Signed STRUCTT datab FLOAT Single Precision Offset value is 10 lt Array 0 gt Label Data Type TEEN TENNE STRUCT data3 fi STRUCT datab FLOAT Single Precision Y Data Type lt Array 1 gt Device Label Name Devi tani data Word Signed evices starting STRUCT1 data Word Signed from D11 are 5 data3 assigned STRUCT 1_datad Double W ord Signed STRUCTT datab FLOAT Single Precision 5 24 5 6 4 Assigning devices to
94. button Active Step Monitor Monitors the SFC step active inactive status of the specified block 037 Monitoring SFC step active inactive status of the specified block 12 5 4 Batch monitoring all blocks monitoring active steps 12 13 J H Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES CONVERTING ma TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING PROGRAMS lt x Q T LLI ae c N CONTROLLER CPU MONITORING CD 2 O D O O lt LLI APPENDIX INDEX GX Works2 lm MELSOFT Ww 12 MONITORING Monitoring SFC step active inactive status of the specified block Monitor the SFC step active inactive status in the list display Operating procedure Place the cursor at the block to be monitored on the SFC All Block Batch Monitoring Monitor b utton Active Ste screen and click the The Active Step Monitor screen is displayed If the program is monitored with the programmable controller CPU that is never set to RUN after its reset all SFC steps are displayed as uncreated steps If the program is monitored with the programmable controller CPU set to STOP the status at the STOP setting is displayed as the monitoring result Active Step 0 Block Stop Monitoring Uncreated Step CL n 2 ui iD x e Active Step 12 5 4 Batch monitoring all blocks m
95. con Ej CARRY1 dps Parameter E CARRY2 Function Block Intelligent Function Modul Get mich cut pt to 1000 gt E SYOKIKA Global Device Comment HE Selection window Global Label Navigation t m setting La Set lower linit of ring counter gt window z Bog Hi4 Kl lt MAIN sk Program 3 Sek upper limit of ring counter gt G 1 ment 1 ahal HI6 K2000 Kl i gt Set initial set complete flag gt Work window b Connection Destination i Cross Reference Watch 1 Docki ng ndow Cross Reference Information Condition Setting Device Label Current Value Data Type XO Bit x1 Bit Device Label Device Bit Bit Bit Device Label All Device Label LD Step No 11 Y4 l Step No 12 M10 AMI l Step No 13 M10 SET Step No 101w gt 45 all devices label cross referer Analyze and display current program after pressing Find gt Japanese Simple Host Station NLP Display contents Name Description Reference Title bar Display project name Menu bar Display menu options for executing each function Toolbar Display tool buttons for executing each function Appendix 1 main screen used for operations such as programming parameter setting and monitoring GX Works2 Version 1 sub screen to support operations performed on work Operating Manual window Common Work window Docking window
96. create operation output transition condition programs on the Zoom editor window gt MELSAP3 RG 000 Block PRG 000 Block Transition No 1 Co 1b w 3 1 PRG 000 Block Transition No 1 Comment for Transition 1 2 2 lt GO 5 NO Q u 25 ra OO OO ru aa MELSAP L MELSAP L is description format which supports development efficiency of sequence programming and establishment of program components Each machine control command can be established as a component by describing operation flow and machine controls separately as in describing a machine operation sequence in MELSAP L and controls with machine interlocks in Sequence program Furthermore since output conditions such as interlocks cannot be written in MELSAP L steps a corrective action can be performed instantly for a such trouble in which the step output cannot be detected even though the step is activated PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS lt MELSAP L side gt lt Sequence program side gt The operation flow is easy to understand by Program components can be established by creating SFC programs relating to interlock conditions creating programs contain interlock conditions regardless of the operation flow Ascentend Emergency Ascent Descent position stop Descent Emergency Descent Ascent position 50 2 EDITING LADDE
97. for each label setting editor 3 O Applicable x Not applicable Type of usable label setting editor S 2 Class Description Global label Leca Functionblock z2 label label vie OO ru na VAR GLOBAL common label that can be used for programs and function m blocks VAR GLOBAL A common label with a constant value that can be used for CONSTANT programs and function blocks VAR A label that can be used for programs and function blocks O x PROGRAM y CONFIGURATIONS VAR_CONSTANT A label with a constant value that can be used for programs and function blocks VAR RETAIN A latch type label that is used within the range of declared program and function block A label that is used for an input of function block VAR_INPUT Its value cannot be changed in a POU VAR_OUTPUT A label that is used for an output of function block x A label that can be used for both input and output of function VAR IN OUT block with the same name SETTING LABELS Its value can be changed in a POU 1 Not supported by FXCPU EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 2 9 1 Classes 5 13 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5 5 2 Data types Label data types are described in the following table For details such as value ranges of each data type refer to the following manuals MELSEC Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fund
98. for program editors App 13 GX Works2 APPENDIX Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when they are out of the Section fa SFC Auto Scroll 12 5 1 screen during monitoring Switch the mode of the open window to I Shift F2 Read Mode Read Mode TR Switch the mode of the open window to 6 1 2 ft Switch the mode of the open window to i enter Mode Monitor Mode during monitoring Switch the mode of the open window to Section 12 2 Monitor Write Mode during Shift Monitor Write Mode monitoring Zoom Change the display magnification ratio of Section the SFC diagram 2 3 2 Shift Shift Linsert Insert Insert a row at the cursor Insert a row at the cursor position Shift shift Delete Delete Row a row at the cursor position Section Ctr insert Insert Insert Column Insert a column at the cursor position 7 3 11 Ctrl Ctr 4 Delete Delete Column Delete a column at the cursor Delete a column at the cursor position dues Move a cursor to the SFC step Section cI G transition number the specified block 8 2 1 Move cursor to the step of the jump Section Move a cursor to the SFC step number Section Numeric key transition number 8 2 3 B SFC Step Transition Display th
99. function L GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common System label System labels whose Attribute is set to Common are not supported by LCPU System labels whose Attribute is set to Common or Link are not supported by FXCPU e Importing system labels with MELSOFT Navigator may cause an error at compilation with GX Works2 Check the corresponding error location and correct the error as instructed by the error message displayed on the output window 5 3 Setting Local Labels for Programs 5 3 Setting Local Labels for Programs This section explains how to set local labels used for each program Screen display Select Project view gt POU gt Program gt program gt Local Label OVERVIEW z O 5 Es Local Label Setting MAIN PRG O Z 3 Ose Device Comment 4 5 5 nO 7 3 Le SSS EN CD Operating procedure 55 Set the items on the screen 2 m Maximum number of Item Description characters Class Select a label class from the list displayed by clicking l _ lt Section 5 5 1 Label Name Enter a desired label name Todd Se Specify a data type from the Data Type Selection screen displayed by Data Type clicking gt gt Section 5 5 3 128 It can also be entered directly Enter a constant value when VAR CONSTANT is selected for Class and simple type is selected fo
100. in output window Select whether to use device names typed Use lower case device with lower case as labels Compile names as labels 2 Only the device name outside device range E Condition 1 is valid for Inline Structured Text Select whether to connect directly from the PUNGEN CUPU Seng objective function output to other input DJINT TO BOOL E DWORD TO BOOL E ST TIME TO BOOL E Structured NOT E 26 Q Compile LIMITAION E Select whether to generate code to keep 2 Condition 2 MAXIMUM bit type output of objective function MINIMUM E E GE ELT E LE E AND E OR E XOR E Structured Ladder FBD GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project 13 5 GX Works2 13 SETTING OPTIONS Intelligent Function Module 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module IQ Works Interaction 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Checking this option enables use of the option setting of MELSOFT Navigator The option setting specified in MELSOFT Navigator at the time of opening this project System Label Setting 1 is used Section 5 2 Set how to name system labels When System Label Name system labels are entered system label Setting names are determined based on this setting at the time of project save Use MELSOFT Navigator Option Information 1 Not supported by FXCPU 2 Not supported by Simple project
101. labels when compiling all programs For assigning devices to labels when compiling all programs refer to Section 10 3 3 10 2 3 Executing online program change simultaneously with conversion compilation INDEX APPENDIX gt For the operation for executing the Online program change simultaneously with the conversion compilation refer to the following manual gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 10 2 2 Compiling all programs 10 7 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 2 4 Changing operating conditions of compilation Change the operating conditions of compilation Changing the number of errors and warnings that stops compilation The number of errors and warnings that stops compilation can be changed If the number of errors and warnings that occurred during compilation reaches the specified value the compilation is aborted Screen display Select Tool gt Options gt Compile gt Output Result Stop Build prae Stop Build by Error 23 Warning 1001 mm Operating procedure Setthe items on the screen Item Description Error Set the number of errors that stops compilation 1 to 9999 Warning Set the number of warnings that stops compilation 1 to 9999 10 8 10 2 4 Changing operating conditions of compilation 10 2 For Projects with Labels Hiding warning messages Messages displayed in the Output window when compiling progra
102. ladder programs 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 Creating Ladders sisse 6 2 Entering Instructions 6 6 Using Function Blocks 6 18 Using Inline Structured 6 26 Moving Cursor to Start of Ladder Block 6 31 Drawing Lines 6 32 Deleting Contacts Coils and Application Instructions 6 35 Deleting Lines 6 38 Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns 6 41 Batch Inserting and Deleting NOP Instructions 6 45 Cutting Copying and Pasting Ladders 6 47 Canceling Previous Operation 6 53 Precautions on Editing Ladders 6 55 Changing Setting Values 6 62 Setting Program Linkage Order 6 64 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SCREEN QJ 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS O 0 0 gt og Zo EO 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 1 Creating Ladders This section explains how to create ladders and related functions 6 1 1 Switching between overwrite
103. lt x Q T LLI ae c N CONTROLLER CPU 2 Select Online Monitor Start Monitoring ER While the transition monitoring function is activated the following warning message is displayed when a SFC step that does not transfer after passing the specified time is detected Note that the display of the warning message may be delayed from the specified time depending on the operating system of the personal computer MONITORING MELSOFT Series GX Works There is a step not switched over for the past 10 seconds 6 19 2008 5 39 18 PM Detection A Programi Program File Mame MAIN Black D Block 2 O H Q O O 2 Step 1 0 corresponding SFC step the SFC diagram is displayed by clicking the button When the Stop Transition Watch Monitor when Detected item is checked in the Transition x Watch Monitor setting the transition monitoring function is stopped by the detection of an error step but the normal monitoring continues operating 0 2 12 5 2 Monitoring transitions 12 11 r GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12 5 3 Monitoring operation outputs and transition conditions Monitor operation outputs transition conditions of SFC steps transitions on the Zoom editor window Operating procedure 1 Select View gt Open Zoom Start Destination Block The Zoom editor window is displayed 2 Select Online gt
104. memory 12 5 monitoring function block programs 12 3 Monitoring operation outputs and transition conditions He 12 12 Monitoring SFC block list 2 12 15 Monitoring SFC Programs pp 12 8 Monitoring transitions ueri oo nr eun 12 11 MONIONDG V LE eem 13 4 Moving statements or notes 9 17 N Navigation WINdOW Kast 2 2 NESTNG NUMBER E ETE 2 5 6 5 New Declaration After 2 5 18 New Declaration Before Normal SFC type NOE JAER number of contacts pp O oflser valles xxu andi pages or d Open Branch OEIC ONTACL EE operation output transition condition Operation Result Falling Pulse 6 6 Operation Result Rising Pulse 6 6 jeep ume 13 2 Output ladder Darts dene eu bene 6 24 Output window 2 2 10 6 10 7 10 9 10 18 P Pand Istatemebnls ass 9 6 NE 9 3 parameters for SFC programs 7 45 PN 6 47 ES Une 7 30 Pasting function blocks 6 19 Peripheral
105. mode and insert mode Switch between Overwrite mode and Insert mode Select the appropriate mode to create programs The operation procedures in this chapter are explained under the Overwrite mode as the basic setting Operating procedure Press the insert key The mode switches alternately between Overwrite and Insert each time the key is pressed color of the cursor on the editing screen changes according to the active mode Se In the Overwrite mode contacts coils or application instructions newly input at the cursor position overwrite the existing ones Example Changing X20 to a horizontal line in the Overwrite mode Cursor position x10 x30 Y100 2 In the Insert mode contacts coils or application instructions newly input at the cursor position are inserted in front of the cursor Example Inserting X15 in front of X20 in the Insert mode A o M Cursor position x10 x15 x20 x30 2 _ Y100 6 2 6 1 1 Switching between overwrite mode and insert mode 6 1 Creating Ladders 6 1 2 Switching between write mode and read mode Switch between write mode and read mode or monitor write mode and monitor mode Switch the mode to avoid editing programs directly OVERVIEW Write mode monitor write mode select when editing the ladders
106. moved to the rows below the end row e Find FEND Searches FEND SRET and IRET instructions in each program When the instructions exist in the programs symbols are displayed the FEND or SRET IRET column on the Program Linkage Order Setting screen PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS Point Number of programs that can be created A maximum number of programs that can be created is 64 Subroutine and interrupt programs When creating a subroutine or an interrupt program individually set the linkage order to execute those programs after the FEND instruction Program condition after linkage order change After the linkage order is changed on the Program Linkage Order Setting screen all programs are in the uncompiled status Security setting The access authority cannot be set for the program linkage order setting EDITING LADDER zN PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS MEMO aN MELSOFT T EDITING SFC PROGRAMS This chapter explains the functions of the program editor for editing SFC programs 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 List OF SFC Symbols Difference between MELSAP3 and MELSAP L Creating SFC Diagrams Deleting SFC
107. na Pause Mode Bit Type Program Number of Active Steps Register Language SF Continuous Transition Bit Last Change 12 7 2008 1 56 53 PM Type Program Language SPE Last Change 6 9 2009 2 28 54 PM PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Operating procedure o Set the items related to the block information on the screen l Item Description 2 Title Enter the title of the SFC block The number of applicable characters is 32 E Specify the SFC block number 0 to 319 Note that 0 to 127 for QO2UCPU and 0 to 24 for Block No FXCPU Enter devices labels to the required items as block information devices The number of Block normalen applicable characters is 32 Point Title of SFC block projects without labels The set block title is stored as a device comment of device BLm A block title can be created changed by entering BLm for the device name on the device comment editor When setting block titles for each program create comments by program For creating and editing device comments refer to the following manual 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Title of SFC block projects with labels rd When the block title is set the confirmation message asking whether to copy the block to the device comment lt of device BLm is displayed Creating device comment for the device set as BLm the device comment editor is 2 not applied to t
108. of GX Works2 GX Works2 GX Works2 Version 1 GX Works2 Beginner s Manual Operating Manual Purpose Installation i Simple Structured Cannon Simple Structured intelligent Project Project Project Project Instructions Function Module Learning the operating environment and installation method Learning a USB driver installation method Learning all functions of GX Works2 Learning the project types and available languages in GX Works2 Learning the basic operations and operating procedures when creating simple project for the first time Learning the basic operations and operating procedures when creating a structured project for the first time Learning the operations of available functions regardless of project Learning the functions EEE EEE and operation methods rE Details for programming Oude Learning data setting methods for intelligent function module 2 Operations in each programming language For details of instructions used in each programming language refer to the section 3 on the next page GX Works2 GX Works2 Version 1 Beginner s Manual Operating Manual Purpose Structured Simple Structured Project Project Project Project Ladder Simple 1 Outline 4 5 Outli Structured Project Structured ladder FBD Details Details 1 MELSAP3 and FX series SFC only A 15 3 Details of instruction
109. on the editing screen ow MA 2 9 Lx ex Stop at the connection point 6 40 6 8 2 Deleting vertical or horizontal lines 6 9 Inserting Deleting Rows Columns 6 9 Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns This section explains how to insert and delete rows and columns OVERVIEW Item Shortcut key Insert Row Shift Insert 2 Delete Row shift Delete E 84 Insert Column Ctt Insert 29 LL LL Delete Column Ctrl Delete 58 3 6 9 1 Inserting rows 5 Su 5 zo Insert rows Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where row is inserted PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 2 Toinsert multiple rows drag the cursor and set the range corresponding to the number of rows to be inserted The rows in the set range are inserted To insert a single row it is not necessary to set the range In the screen image below the range for inserting three rows is set SETTING LABELS v EDITING LADDER 44 PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 9 1 Inserting rows 6 41 Er GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3 Select Edit Insert Row A space is inserted above the cursor position The screen image below shows insertion of a space for three
110. right direction is displayed when the screen is opened Change the value as required Deletion number of rows or columns Check to stop deletion on a connecting point when the connecting points such as instructions or vertical lines exist while deleting the horizontal lines for the columns entered to Deletion number of rows or columns Stop at the connection point Set when deleting the horizontal lines This item links with the Stop at the connection points Instruction Vertical Line when enter or delete horizontal line item under Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder gt Ladder Diagram ep SETTING LABELS 4 Clickthe lt button Vertical lines are deleted X100 2 v100 Y200 EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS 2 w Y300 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 8 2 Deleting vertical or horizontal lines 6 39 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Point Initial values of Deletion number of rows or columns The initial value of the Delete HLine screen can be set to 1 with option settings Check Set initial value to 1 for Enter HLine Delete HLine dialog under Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder Ladder Diagram Changing the cursor position on the editing screen while the Delete VLine screen or Delete HLine screen is displayed Use the cte keys to change the cursor position
111. rz 2 x OO E _ _ gt i 4 EI 3 lt CSV file gt h IE L S 1 lt p Class Label Name Data Type Constant Device Comment Remark name Oo 3 YAR GLOBA _ BUD A Co mme RPRemarkUUUU 4 VAR GLOBA G LABELO0002 BOOL X2 Co mment00002 0 0002 X X F MAR GLOBAL G LABELO0003 BOOL X3 GommentOOO003 RemarkO0003 mu 6 GLOBAL C ONSTANT G LABELOOO04 BOOL FALSE Comment00004 4 7 MAR GLOBAL G LABELO0005 BOOL 4 Comment00005 00005 Restrictions When multi byte characters are used in the label name Do not use multi byte characters for label name when using CSV file created in Japanese version of GX PROGRAM y CONFIGURATIONS Works2 in other language version of GX Works2 For GX Works2 with the language version other than Japanese this function supports multi byte characters however the compilation function does not support multi byte characters Therefore the program cannot be compiled properly when multi byte characters are used in a label name SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS MEMO MELSOFT 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS This chapter explains the functions of the ladder editor for editing
112. selected for each project Note that however MELSAP3 and MELSAP L cannot be specified for each block of SFC program For Structured project select one format per project 2 Contact instructions and contact equivalent instructions cannot be entered to operation output programs 3 Each operation output transition condition program is displayed within 32 characters in an SFC diagram If the program exceeds 32 characters it is displayed up to 28th character and is displayed after a space 4 Notes cannot be created 5 Device comments are not displayed on the SFC diagram Device comments are edited and displayed on the device comment editor 6 SFC programs with different display formats can be verified when a project is verified 7 When a program created in MELSAP3 is displayed in MELSAP L the following operation outputs transition conditions are displayed in marks Operation output transition condition contains an NOP instruction Operation output contains a contact instruction or contact equivalent instruction Operation output contains a note When marks are displayed change the format to MELSAP3 and check the ladder Programs created in MELSAP3 cannot be modified or monitored in MELSAP L however a CPU processes them normally To modify and monitor programs in MELSAP L after they are checked in MELSAP3 delete programs displayed in marks on the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen and enter them again in MEL
113. structure array type labels Using bit specification 5 6 Setting Structured Data Type Labels Devices can be set by specifying a bit device of word device when entering devices automatically 1 Click Detail Setting on the label setting screen The Structure Device Setting screen is displayed 2 Check the Use Bit Designation item 3 Set the device name for the start element data of the array Devices are set to the same data type or bit device data type Point Data for which device name can be entered For the structure array type device name can be entered only for the start element of array For the subsequent array elements device names offset from the device number set for the start element are automatically set Offset values e An expression such as 112 be specified for an incremental value of device such as 00160 When 0 is specified for the incremental value the device number same as the data set to the start of devices is set to all data in the array 5 6 4 Assigning devices to structure array type labels 9 25 OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5 7 Setting Ranges for Devices Assigned Automa
114. the Navigation window the ladder blocks from a line statement on a tree view on a ladder to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view are also deleted lt Section 9 5 5 9 24 9 5 3 Disabling setting of line statements on tree view 9 5 Displaying Line Statements Tree View 9 5 4 Moving ladder blocks on tree view Move the ladder blocks on tree view of the Navigation window from a line statement a tree view to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view Operating procedure STATEMENTS NOTES a H o lt 1 Select a line statement on a tree view the Navigation window 2 Drag and drop the line statement to the desired position on the program The ladder blocks from the selected line statement on a tree view to before the next line statement a tree view are moved CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING PROGRAMS Navigation X PRGIWrite MAIN 113 Step Tile Control 21525651 23 n 2 Ar BA Parameter Intelligent Function Module Title amp utomatic m program Global Device Comment M Global Label 16 Program Setting POU 0 B Program 37 me MAIN Title lnitial ae Y72 TO lt G lt L c ac CONTROLLER CPU p 73 Set reset Y75 Y72 Lal fl sees Title Count the number of interru
115. the functions for editing SFC diagrams N OVERVIEW Edit function for editing SFC diagrams Reference Delete Delete the selected data Arrange SFC Redisplay the SFC diagram Section 7 8 Insert Row Insert row at the cursor position 2 Delete Row Delete a row at the cursor position Section 7 3 11 Insert Column Insert column at the cursor position gt Delete Column Delete a column at the cursor position m Edit Line 99 Vertical Line Segment Insert at the cursor position 3 Selection Divergence Insert ar at the cursor position Selection Convergence Insert at the cursor position a Oo Simultaneous Convergence Insert 3m at the cursor position D 2 Delete Line Delete a line at the cursor position Change TC Setting Batch change timer counter setting values used in the Section 6 15 program Ladder Edit Mode Switch the mode of the open window to Read Section 6 1 2 Write Mode Switch the mode of the open window to Write Mode SFC Step Attribute No Attribute Set the step attribute to No Attribute Stored Coil Set the step attribute to Stored Coil Stored Operation without Transition Set the step attribute to Stored Operation SE e Set the step attribute to Stored Operation ST SFC Symbol z STEP Step Insert at the cursor position Section 7 3 1 B Block Start Step with END Check insert
116. the met button 4 The following message is displayed MELSOFT Series GA Works i Imported system label to global label Until the project is saved the imported system label cannot synchronize with the system label database Please save the project 5 Click the 9 button 2 For FXCPU this button is supported by FX3G FX3U and FX3UC only Registers global label as system label 1 Select a global label to register as a system label 2 Click the button 3 The following message is displayed MELSOFT Series GA Works AN selected global label will be registered to the system label Do you wank to continue 4 Click the button 5 2 Setting Global Labels 5 The following message is displayed MELSOFT Series GA Works 6 Click the button uu For FXCPU this button is supported by FX3G FX3U and FX3uc only Disables the relation between a global label and system label After the relation with the system label is disabled the global label becomes a normal global label 1 Select a global label to disable its relation with a system label 2 Click the button 3 The following message is displayed MELSOFT Series GA Works The relation between the selected global label and system label will be disabled Another project may be referring the system label Do vau want to disable 4 Click the 8 _ button 5
117. the option Screen display Select Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder SFC gt Device OVERVIEW Operational Setting gt ER iv icheck duplicated coil ed leder 5 Enter label comment and device comment 20 cz OQ nO Operating procedure 3 Check the Check duplicated coil item r f 2 When coil is entered duplicated coils are checked 2 lt a Available x Not available Not supported Instruction c c Device gt pwn ops epe Les PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS EL me SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 6 2 3 Selecting the duplicated coil check function 6 13 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 2 4 Entering device comments Enter device comment following the entry of a contact coil or application instruction Screen display Select Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder SFC gt Device Operational Setting 7 Check duplicated coil Operating procedure e Check the Enter label comment and device comment item The Input Device Comment screen is displayed by clicking the 9 button after entering contact or application instruction Enter Symbol Mov D1 pz Exit Help Inpu
118. uppermost window Appendix 1 2 Navigation Window toolbar icons The following table shows the Navigation Window toolbar icons beg Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Add New Data Add data to the project Copy selected data Common om Property Display a property of the selected data BEEN Update the display content of the Navigation window Project Property Display a property of the open project Expand All Uncompiled Expand all uncompiled data in the tree on the Data Project view and the User Library view Common Collapse Al Collapse all data in the tree on the Project view and the User Library view S t m 6 Appendix 1 2 Navigation Window toolbar icons Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys Appendix 1 3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for setting labels J H Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES B Label toolbar icons The following table shows the Label toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys S Shortcut key Corresponding menu Description Reference Shift Insert New Declaration Before Add a row above the cursor position New Declaration After Add a row below the cursor position 2 J Shift Delete Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position Read from CSV File Read label settings from the CSV
119. using a latch clear key Clearing will be executed by remote operation or program i VAR Range p Joj 2048 4055 Caution 1 Label nonassigned devices of the automatically assigned ones while compiling will be allotted the device that displayed at the lowest of the selected ones Ex Device will be assigned to ZR when D and ZR are selected 2 Changing the assignment target device may also change the processing speed since the arithmetic processing speed For R and ZR is difference From other devices cane Operating procedure e Set the items on the screen Item Description Select latch 1 or latch 2 Latch selection field Select when the range of latch 1 or latch 2 is set on the lt lt Device gt gt tab of PLC parameters Device Display the devices to be assigned automatically Digit Display whether the range of device assign setting is in decimal or hexadecimal Assignment Selection Check the device to be assigned automatically Multiple devices can be set i Start Assignment C Enter the range of device points to be assigned automatically Range End Total Points Display the total points of each device range for VAR and VAR_RETAIN Display the device point range set on the lt lt Device gt gt tab of PLC parameters PLC Parameter When the latch range is set display the device point range with the latch range Device Setting Range Ex When D 0 to 12287 latch D 5000 to 6000 are set on
120. 008 Jan 2009 Jul 2009 Oct 2009 Manual number The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover Revision SH NA 080780ENG A First edition SH NA 080780ENG B SH NA 080780ENG C SH NA 080780ENG D Model Addition Q00UJ 0000 0010 Q10UDH Q10UDEH Q20UDH Q20UDEH FX series MANUALS Section 2 2 8 Section 2 2 9 Section 5 2 2 Section 5 3 5 Section 11 3 4 Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL Section 1 1 Section 1 3 1 Section 1 3 2 Section 2 1 Section 3 1 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 2 3 Section 5 3 3 Section 5 4 Section 5 6 Section 5 6 2 Section 7 1 1 Section 7 1 2 Section 7 1 5 Section 7 1 6 Section 8 2 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 3 Section 8 4 Section 8 5 1 Section 9 2 Section 9 3 Section 9 4 Section 9 5 Section 9 8 Section 9 8 1 Section 10 1 Section 11 1 Section 11 3 2 Section 12 2 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 1 5 Appendix 1 6 Section 5 1 is changed to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 is changed to Chapter 6 Chapter 6 to 11 are changed to Chapter 7 to 12 Model Addition Q00J 000 001 Chapter 4 Section 6 4 Section 6 5 Section 6 15 Section 9 5 Correction MANUALS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL Section 1 2 Section 1 3 Section 2 1 1 Section 2 2 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 2 7 Section 2 3 1 Section 3 1 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 Section 5 6 1 Section 5 7 Section 6 2 1 Section 6 2 4 Sec
121. 03 ZR1000004 OVERVIEW An instruction that does not fit in row cannot be created in the row If attempted the error message is displayed MO 2 E lt M100 E K2 ii M11 Y gt Sub routine calls between program files 1 6 O O ECALL Character string File name Device name PointerP gt gt NEXT eo Enter Symbol 3 EC v Ri000002zR1000003 291000004 Exit Help ro MELSOFT Series GX Works2 END 1 Edit position is incorrect o 25 lt Q C OO X X aad J In this case insert a new row and enter the instruction MO 3 2 5 M100 gt K1 2 rae M11 e gt DNE LLL MO K1 Y1 5 ECAL K2 o 1 LLI 3 abedefg P1000 2R1000000 2R1000001 2R1000002 781000003 E lt Instruction D gt 281000004 2 H H LLI 0 END 0 Create the wrapping source symbol gt in the row 2 create the wrapping destination x LLI a symbol gt in the row G lt 2 og KO E T d K1 2 7 M11 4 KS eee O 3 cr 3 2 LL i m i ag he Zo abcdefg P1000 zR1000000 zR1000001 zR1000002 zR1000003 K3 EE O Ow Wa zR1000004 5 Q i inati Create a wrapping source symbol gt Create wrapping destination symbol gt g y lt u N X Er GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 4 Ift
122. 1 lt Device automatic assign setting gt Set the following device range D device 8000 to 8002 e ZR device 0 to 1023 Label setting Class Label Name Data Type 1 VAR Label word Signed 2 word Signed 3 FLOAT Double Precision 4 Label D FLOAT Double Precision lt Devices to be assigned to labels gt Example of devices to be 1 Since double precision real requires four devices one device of 08000 is not enough Therefore the next device ZR is assigned Definition Descending order Example 2 lt Device automatic assign setting gt Set the following device range D device 8000 to 8002 ZR device 0 to 1023 lt Label setting gt Class Label Mame Data Type 21 WAR Label amp Word Signed 2 FLOAT Double Precision 3 wilabelC Jwodsigned 4 VAR FLOAT Double Precision lt Devices to be assigned to labels gt Example of devices to be 1 Double precision real requires four devices two device of 08000 to D8001 are not enough Therefore the next device ZR is assigned Definition Descending order 2 Since word signed requires one device D8001 can be assigned Therefore return to the previous device D device and the device is assigned to the label 3 Since double precision real requires four devices one device of 08000 is not enough Therefore the next device ZR is assigned 10 12 10 3 2
123. 1 Select Online Monitor gt Monitor Mode amp Monitor Write Mode 7 When switched to monitor write mode the message shown below is displayed Uncheck the items if the function displayed on message is not executed when switching the mode Monitor Write Mode d Execute the Function below when mode is changed Change the online change setting in Options to Execute online change by Compile Please check Ehe online change setting in Options if you want to edit another program verify PLC and editing target program of Gx Works2 2 Click the gt button The mode is switched between Monitor mode and Monitor write mode 6 4 6 1 2 Switching between write mode and read mode 6 1 Creating Ladders Point Switching between write mode and read mode or monitor write mode and monitor mode When the Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode Read Write Monitor Monitor Write item is unchecked under Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder gt Ladder Diagram the program can be edited directly with the same operation as that in the write mode for ladder editing and the monitor write mode for monitoring Precautions on read mode monitor mode The programs cannot be edited directly in the read mode monitor mode However executing the following operation may change the programs OVERVIEW When the source FB name is cha
124. 11 3 30 37 PM Operating procedure e Set the items on the screen Item Description lt lt Details gt gt Enter the title of the SFC program The number of applicable characters is 32 SFC Program Type Setting Select the Normal SFC type or Control SFC type All blocks following the set block number become periodic execution blocks To process all blocks in every scan leave this field blank The execution interval is entered within the range of 1 to 65535ms in unit of 1ms Periodic Execution Block When the blocks the specified range is active and the start operation is requested from another block an error occurs and the operation of the programmable controller CPU Act at Block Multi stops Activated 2 The operating mode at the multiple activation for blocks out of the specified range becomes standby To set the operating mode to standby for all blocks leave the start and end fields blank When the multiple activation of SFC steps occurs the SFC steps in the range specified for the Waiting Blocks are set in standby status until the corresponding SFC steps become inactive Act at Step Multi When the multiple activation of SFC steps occurs the SFC steps in the range specified for Activated 1 the Stop Blocks become error and the operation of the programmable controller CPU stops When the multiple activation of SFC steps occurs the SFC steps out of the specified range are fo
125. 18 2 3 2 Changing display size of editing screen 2 3 3 Displaying MELSAP L programs SFC diagram Display programs on the SFC diagram when editing in MELSAP L Operating procedure Select View Program Display Select the menu again to hide the programs 2 marks are displayed for programs that cannot be displayed in MELSAP L u cC A 9 2 3 4 Displaying hiding SFC step transition comments Display hide SFC step transition comments in the created SFC diagram Operating procedure Select View SFC Step Transition Comment ct F5 Select the menu again to hide SFC step transition comments ol Joma 0 0 amp aout01 5 1 Laswitch2 2 3 SFC Editor 2 3 3 Displaying MELSAP L programs on SFC diagram NG OVERVIEW OD Ree llc hole 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 3 5 Setting number of columns for SFC diagram display Set the number of divergences that can be edited and displayed for the SFC diagram Screen display Select View gt SFC Row Setting SFC Row Setting Col Number Hi zal OK Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item D
126. 21 TERM NNN 22 1 OVERVIEW 1 11 18 1 1 What is Simple Project 1 2 1 2 Features of Simple Project 1 2 1 3 List of Functions 1 3 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured 1 3 1 3 2 List of functions for editing in ladder 1 14 1 3 3 List of functions for editing SFC 1 17 1 3 4 List of functions for editing SFC block 1 18 13320 List of functions for Structured 1 18 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 22 2 1 Overview of Screen Configuration 2 2 2 2 Ladder Editor 2 3 2 2 1 ENE TN 2 3 2 2 2 Changing display size of editing 2 5 2 2 3 Changing text size on editing screen 2 6 2 2 4 Displaying Niding COMMONS Gasser 2 6 2 2 5 Displaying hiding lines of monitored current 2 7 2 2 6 Setting number of rows and columns for displaying 2 22 2 8 2 2 7 Setting number of contacts to be displayed in ladder programs 2 9 2 2 8 Switching display between label names and devices 2 10 2 2 9 Hiding ladder DIOCKS
127. 287 KI gray BCD D12287 012286 Er a END 2 88 2 K1000 D2287 TO HO KO D12287 K1 4 BCD D12287 D12286 END 10 1 2 Converting all programs Batch convert all unconverted programs in the project Operating procedure e Select Compile gt Build All All unconverted programs are converted 10 1 3 Executing online program change simultaneously with ladder conversion For the operation for executing the Online program change simultaneously with the ladder conversion refer to the following manual 3 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 10 2 10 1 1 Converting created programs 10 1 For Projects without Labels 10 1 4 Checking programs Check errors such as duplicated coils or device range in the created programs The check result is displayed in the Output window Screen display 9 o E zi zz zo Ok LL Oz Z KEE Gar 2 10 Select Tool gt Check Program Check Program MAIN Check Contents Instruction Check Duplicated Coil Check Close W Ladder Check Device Check Consiskency pair Check CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE fe CONTROLLER CPU HENI PROGRAMS Check Target Target the Whole Program Target the Current Program lt x Q T LLI ae c Operating procedure 1 Setthe items on the screen
128. 4 EATS THING DOTES c 9 9 9 2 5 Modifying and deleting notes 9 11 9 3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes 9 13 9 4 Changing the Type PLC Peripheral of Statement Note 9 21 9 5 Displaying Line Statements on Tree View 9 22 9 5 1 Line statements OM tree VEN Naa 9 22 9 5 2 Displaying line statements on tree 9 23 9 5 3 Disabling setting of line statements on tree view 9 24 9 5 4 Moving ladder blocks on tree view 9 25 9 5 5 Deleting ladder blocks on tree view 9 26 9 6 Jumping from Line Statement List 9 27 9 7 Merge Process when Reading Programs from Programmable Controller CPU 9 28 9 7 1 NIeigeiIGGRSS ions phi M MA n Dn foot 9 28 9 7 2 Performing MENE POLE SS area 9 29 9 8 Editing SFC Comments 9 30 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 1 to 10 20 10 1 For Projects without Labels 10 2 10 1 1 Converting created 10 2 1012 Converting all DrOgrarfis doe e ee Seed 10 2 10 1 3 Executing online program change simultaneously with ladder conversion 10 2 Toka Checking program S TE LET 10 3 10 2 For Projects with Labels 10 5 10 2 1 Converting compiling created 10 5 1022 Comping alprog ans
129. 5 3 128 It can also be entered directly Enter a constant value when VAR CONSTANT is selected for Class and Constant 128 simple type is selected for Data Type Enter a comment Comment 1 2 Comments be displayed on the program editor by switching display hide of 1024 comments Section 2 2 4 SETTING LABELS 1 A new line can be inserted in a cell by pressing the Cirt Enter keys 2 The compilation is not needed after editing EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Point When label setting is changed after utilizing function blocks When the label setting of function block which is utilized to the ladder is changed compile the program or all programs The change of input output label is applied to the ladder Note that the change is not applied when the FB instance is not registered in the global label setting or local label setting 9 Class setting When an item other than the class such as a label name or data type is set in a blank column VAR is automatically set for Class Change it if necessary Characters that be used for label names Any of the following label names causes an error at compilation A label name that includes a space A label name that begins with a numeral A label name which is same as the one used for devices For char
130. 5 7 Section 6 15 Section 7 1 Section 7 3 1 Section 7 3 2 Section 7 3 3 Section 7 3 4 Section 7 3 5 Section 7 3 6 Section 7 3 7 Section 7 3 8 Section 7 3 9 Section 7 9 Section 8 2 5 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 2 2 Section 10 2 5 Section 12 5 1 Section 13 2 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 1 2 Appendix 1 6 Section 2 3 3 to Section 2 3 4 are changed to Section 2 3 4 to Section 2 3 5 Section 7 2 to Section 7 11 are changed to Section 7 3 to Section 7 12 Sep 2010 SH NA 080780ENG G Addition Section 5 8 Correction Section 1 2 Section 1 3 1 Section 1 3 2 Section 1 3 3 Section 1 3 4 Section 2 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 2 Section 5 7 Section 6 2 1 Section 6 2 3 Section 6 2 4 Section 6 2 6 Section 6 3 6 Section 6 4 3 Section 6 4 5 Section 6 15 Section 7 1 Section 7 9 2 Section 7 9 3 Section 7 12 2 Section 8 1 2 Section 8 2 3 Section 9 3 Section 9 6 2 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 2 2 Section 10 2 3 Section 10 2 5 Section 11 1 Section 12 5 1 Section 13 1 2 Section 14 2 Appendix 1 2 Appendix 1 6 Print date Manual number Revision Jan 2011 SH NA 080780ENG H Addition TERMS Section 5 5 1 Section 5 5 2 Section 6 16 Correction MANUALS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL Section 1 2 Section 1 3 1 Section 2 1 Section 2 2 6 Section 4 1 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 3 Section 5 6 1 Section 6 2 7 Section 6 3 1 Section
131. 6 3 3 Section 6 3 5 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 10 1 Section 7 1 Section 7 3 7 Section 8 1 2 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 2 2 Section 12 4 Section 13 1 Section 13 2 Appendix 1 Section 5 5 1 to Section 5 5 2 are changed to Section 5 5 3 to Section 5 5 4 Mar 2011 SH NA 080780ENG I fAqdition Section 10 3 Correction MANUALS Section 1 3 1 Section 1 3 3 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 2 Section 5 5 3 Section 5 7 Section 5 7 1 Section 6 2 1 Section 6 3 6 Section 6 4 5 Section 7 13 Section 10 2 1 Section 11 1 Section 13 2 Appendix 1 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 1 6 Section 10 3 is changed to Section 10 4 Model Addition Addition Section 2 2 5 Section 6 1 2 Section 8 1 1 Section 8 2 2 Section 9 5 Appendix 1 2 Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL Section 1 2 Section 1 3 1 Section 1 3 2 Section 1 3 3 Section 2 1 Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 6 Section 2 2 8 Section 2 3 1 Section 4 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Section 5 7 1 Section 6 1 1 Section 6 2 4 Section 6 2 6 Section 6 2 7 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 4 3 Section 6 4 4 Section 6 6 2 Section 6 8 2 Section 7 9 1 Section 8 1 Section 9 2 1 Section 9 2 2 Section 9 2 3 Section 9 3 Section 9 5 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 2 2 Section 10 3 3 Section 11 1 Section 12 1 Section 12 5 1 Section 13 1 Section 13 2 Appendix 1 Section 2 2 6 to Section 2 2 9 are changed to Section 2 2 7 to Section 2 2 10 Section 8 1 1
132. 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS ru For FXCPU this button is supported by FX3G FX3U FX3UC only Imports system labels to the project 1 Click the meot button The Import System Labels to Project screen is displayed Import System Labels to Project System Label List Name All Refinement Options one vi Blister le which is out of display target Is Display only system labels with no device assigned Refinement Characters Refinement Find Subject Whole Display Find Characters Find Next Select System Label Name Label Name Data Constant CPUName Project Name Device Attribute Comment Label muli Label muli Word Signed QO6UDHCPU Simple 02 U3E1 G0 Common Label_mul2 Label_mul2 Word Signed QO6UDHCPU Simple 02 U3E1 G1 Common Label_mul3 Label_mul3 Word Signed QO6UDHCPU Simple 02 U3E1 G2 Common Label mul4 Label mul4 Word Signed QO6UDHCPU Simple 02 U3E1 G3 Common Label mul5 Label mul5 Word Signed QO6UDHCPU Simple 02 U3E1 G4 Common 1 gt oon on fw Ne ES Relationship diagram between system label database 1 and project 2 org Import n een 2 Check Select system label to import to the project 3 Click
133. ABELS Shortcut key With check Write mode 2 Shift 2 Start Monitoring Monitor mode Shift Start Watching Monitor write mode Monitor write mode for FXCPU Monitor write mode is not supported by FXCPU in the following conditions Read mode EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS When using FXos or FX1 52 When using SFC programs 2 When the simulation function is being performed EO The Verify PLC and editing target program of GX Works2 function is not supported when the mode is changed to na monitor Write mode in project with labels Verify the program with the Verify with PLC function before changing 8 the mode to monitor write mode 2 gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common lt TO 25 N X 6 1 2 Switching between write mode and read mode 6 5 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 2 Entering Instructions This section explains how to enter instructions using menus For other entering methods refer to the Points of each section 6 2 1 Entering contacts coils and application instructions Enter contacts coils and application instructions Contacts coils and application instructions are entered by using the Enter Symbol screen Item Shortcut key Open Contact 5 Shift F5 Close Contact 6 Close Branch Shift F6 Coi
134. CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 2 6 Opening label setting screen for program being edited Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being edited Operating procedure e Select View gt Open Header T PRG MAIN Operation Stop Operation Ready OperationStart1 Fs Local Label Setting MAIN PRG BE Class Label Name Data Type Constant Device Operation Stop Bit VAR v Operation Ready Bit fu 2 VAR wlOperationStatl ii VAR w OperationStat2 VAR Setting Flag Bt ful VAR Fu 14 il VAR y EroDetection Bl fu poo VAR v Tank Tempertuer Double WordSigned J 9 10 y ModuleReady Bt 4 C0 whe lt 4 4 4 4 4 6 2 7 Creating wrapping rows Wrapping symbols are automatically created if wrapping of a row is required when creating a ladder block However wrapping symbols can be entered manually as desired The following explains how to wrap rows by manually entering wrapping symbols Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where a wrapping source symbol gt is entered When entering a wrapping source symbol gt move the cursor to the second or subsequent columns X10 X20 X30 X40 2 Select Edi
135. Character data are read lt FXCPU gt Read from PLC ve 2 Merge process is performed when data are read from the programmable controller CPU The following table shows the different process status with the execution of the merge process when reading programs from the programmable controller CPU For FXCPU the merge process is executed automatically and character data of the step position where data can be displayed are read Table 9 7 1 1 Merge process status of Peripheral statement note Setting CPU type Process status Not executing the QCPU Q mode eee Character data are not read merge process LCPU Peripheral note Executati Peripheral statement oe oe ede Character data are read process LCPU Peripheral note 0 28 9 7 1 Merge process 9 7 Merge Process when Reading Programs from Programmable Controller CPU 9 7 2 Performing merge process Perform the merge process when reading sequence programs from the programmable controller CPU Operating procedure STATEMENTS NOTES H O o lt 1 Open the sequence program project saved the personal computer Open the sequence program project which is the same data as the sequence program project to be read from the programmable controller CPU For the method for opening project refer to the following manual gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common CONVERTING
136. Cursor Y Q Left power rail Right base line SETTING LABELS Display contents Name Description Title bar Display a data type data name and or other information of the open data Step number Display a start step number of the ladder block An area for editing ST programs on the ladder editor in project with labels lt Section 6 4 Cursor Data at the cursor position are edited Inline structured text box EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Left power rail Base lines of ladder programs Right base line Indicate the end of a ladder program END line Programs cannot be created beyond the END line EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 2 2 1 Editing screen 2 3 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Displaying title bar The following items are displayed on a title bar Item Description Display nesting number when the cursor position is on the nesting of master Nesting number of master control control Data type Display a data type of data being open Display the ladder edit mode Section 6 1 2 For when programs are monitored and for when programs are not monitored Ladder edit mode Monitoring and Stop Monitoring are appended respectively When the Execute online change by Compile item is selected in the option setting R is prefixed to the ladder edit mode Data name Display data name of data being open Display
137. Display PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS PRG 000 Block5 SETTING LABELS IR Label1 Label 1 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt c t LLI 0o REPLACE 2 3 6 Changing SFC display format 2 21 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION MEMO 2 5 2 3 6 Changing SFC display format SWVYDONd OO 94S ONILIGS GNV HONV3S SWVYSONd YIGAVT ONILIGS SNOILVYNDISNOOD L ST49VW1 ONILLAS NVYDOUd NOLLVHNDIANOO f EH Isle tele N33HOS ONINNVYDOUd MAIANSAO IN Creating Programs This chapter explains procedure for creating programs in Simple project 3 1 3 OS MELSOFT GX Works2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 1 Creating Programs This section explains the general operating steps from the creation of a program in Simple project to the execution of the created program in the programmable controller CPU 1 Creating new project Procedure Reference Start up GX Works2 GX Works2 Version 1 Create a new Simple project Operating Manual To utilize an existing Simple project open that Simple project Common LL 2 Setting parameters Procedure Reference Set parameters GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Check parameters Common LL 3 Setting labels when using labels 1 Procedure Reference Define global labels C
138. I F5 Insert an open contact branch at the 4 H I Shift Fs Insert closed contact at the cursor Section 6 2 Insert closed contact branch at the ad F7 Insert at the cursor position m m 7 za App 10 Appendix 1 7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys o o LLI ssl Shortcut key Corresponding menu Description Reference 2 5 lt Insert rising pulse close branch at the e Shift 7 Rising Pulse Close Branch ursor Section 6 2 2 z gt Insert falling pulse close branch at the Zu Shift FS Falling Pulse Close Branch cursor position SE Operation Result Rising Insert an operation result rising pulse at t aF5 FS the cursor position Operation Result Falling Insert an operation result falling pulse at er x 8 F10 Insert an operation result inversion at the Invert Operation Results cursor position Edit Line Input a line at the cursor position Section 6 6 Delete Line Delete the line at the cursor position Section 6 8 Insert Inline Structured Section B Insert an inline structured text box 642 Edit device comments Common Statement Edit statements Section 9 2 Statement Note Batch Edit Batch edit statements notes Section 9 3 Display the list of line statements
139. IGURATIONS aution gt Maximum number of MOPs is the numbers which can be set when the program is used alone The total program step must not exceed the PLC capacity when you use plural programs SETTING LABELS 3 Set the items on the screen Item Description Number of Insert NOPs Set the number of NOP instructions to be inserted Maximum Number of Insert NOPs EDITING LADDER 44 PROGRAMS Display a maximum number of NOP instructions that can be inserted 4 Click the gt button The set number of NOP instructions is inserted in the program O 0 oe 0 og fult O EO The step number 8 is changed il 52 54 lt TO N X 6 10 1 Batch inserting NOP instructions 6 45 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 10 2 Batch deleting NOP instructions Batch delete NOP instructions in the program Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt NOP Batch Delete The confirmation message is displayed MELSOFT Series GA Works AN Execute batch delete 2 Clickthe button All NOP instructions in the program are deleted X10 v70 END v v The step number 5 is changed 9 2 6 46 6 10 2 Batch deleting instructions 6 11 Cutting Copying and Pasting Ladders 6 11 Cutting Copying Pasting Ladders This section explains how to cut copy and pa
140. Input Variablez VAR OUTPUT Operation Result WW ond Signed FR Oupa KE PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 5 5 4 Editing rows 5 19 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5 6 Setting Structured Data Type Labels This section explains how to set structured data type labels 5 6 1 Setting data type of structure Set the elements of the structure on the Structure Setting screen Screen display Select Project view gt POU gt Structured Data Types gt structure al r r E Structure Setting Struct1 Sele LablName DataType Comment STRUCTI_datal w ord Sianed Mme Jj STRULTI data Ward Signed 12 004 STRUCTI data3 Bi 141 Membe 0002 412 Meme 004 STRUCT 1 data FLOAT Single Precision Member 04 Mn dd AAR Ai Operating procedure e Set the items on the screen Maximum number Item Description of characters Label Name Enter a desired label name 32 Specify a data type from the Data Type Selection screen displayed by Data Type clicking gt Section 5 5 3 128 It can also be entered directly Constant Display the constant value of the selected type 128 Enter comments Comment A new line can be inserted a cell by pressing the Ctrl Enter 1024 keys
141. Inserting Deleting Instructions 6 45 6 10 1 Batch inserting instructions 6 45 6 10 2 Batch deleting instructions 6 46 6 11 Cutting Copying Pasting Ladders 6 47 6 11 1 Pasting cut or copied ladders in unit 6 47 6 11 2 Pasting cut or copied ladders by setting a 6 49 611 3 Tasundgcutorcobied ladder 6 50 6 12 Canceling Previous Operation 6 53 6 12 1 ve 6 53 6 13 Restoring Ladders to the Status of After Conversion 6 54 6 14 Precautions on Editing Ladders 6 55 6 15 Changing T C Setting Values 6 62 6 16 Setting Program Linkage Order FXCPU 6 64 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 1to7 50 7 1 List of SFC Symbols 7 2 7 2 Difference between MELSAP3 MELSAP L 7 6 7 3 Creating SFC Diagrams 7 9 7 3 1 Entering SFC steps BH 7 10 7 3 2 Entering block start steps H3 EJ Re Ra ERA sa datus 7 12 7 3 3 Entering series transitions 7 13 7 3 4 Entering selection divergences 7 15 735 Entering simultaneous divergences FT 7 16 7 3 6 Entering selection convergences ssssssssssssesseeeee nennen nennen nennen 7 17 7 3 7 Entering simultaneous convergences sssssssssssssseeeeeeeenenen nene nnns 7 19 7 3 8 Entering jump transitions Lig
142. JUMP Jump destination step number Enter a jump destination step number Step Attribute This setting is not required Block This setting is not required Comment This setting is not required 4 Click the button The entered jump transition symbol is displayed Enter a jump transition gt 11 7 22 7 3 8 Entering jump transitions 7 3 9 Entering end steps Enter end step For FXCPU setting of RET or END is not necessary since it is written automatically at the program entry conversion Operating procedure 7 3 Creating SFC Diagrams 1 Move the cursor to the position where an end step is entered 2 Select Edit gt SFC Symbol gt END Step The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen is displayed accordance with the display format setting lt MELSAP3 gt SFC step number Enter SFC Symbol Eg a dle 380 Easy Cancel 3 Set the items on the screen Symbol Item SFC step number Step Attribute Block Comment Select END This setting is not required This setting is not required This setting is not required This setting is not required Click the _ button The entered end step symbol is displayed Enter an end step Description 0 11 11 1 7 3 9 Entering end steps 7 23 OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X
143. L BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS Print date Jul 2
144. Labels This section explains how to convert compile the uncompiled programs created in the project with labels ouo E zi zz zo Ok LL Oz Z KEE Gar 2 10 10 2 1 Converting compiling created programs Convert compile created program Since this process compiles only uncompiled programs the compiling time can be reduced CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU HENI PROGRAMS Compilation target Converts compiles uncompiled programs only Sequence Sequence Program 2 program 2 Sequence Program 3 program 3 lt x D zZ Q T LLI or 22 Point Conversion and compilation The following explains the difference between conversion and compilation Conversion Confirms edited content of ladder SFC programs Compilation Assigns devices to labels and creates a code to execute the program in a programmable controller CPU MONITORING CD 2 O D O O lt 42 Operating procedure 1 Select Compile gt Build The Confirm Build Method screen is displayed Confirm Build Method There is a program that has nat been compiled Please choose one of the following actions Just converts the program in the active window Does not compile f Execute compile after conversion Compiles the entire project The compile process may take several minutes to complete
145. MENTS STATEMENTS NOTES Deleting notes Delete note Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the note to be deleted 9 tatt 2 Press the Delete key The note is deleted x44 CALL Point Notes can be modified or deleted on the Enter Symbol screen Move the cursor to the coil or application instruction whose note is deleted or modified and press the key The Enter Symbol screen is displayed Modify or delete the note as shown below Operation Preparation Confirm gt YO Oper Do not delete when modifying a note Delete as well when deleting a note When changing to Peripheral enter after When changing Peripheral to PLC delete postfixed to Sa ER 0 Operation Preparation Confirrr Displaying notes on the editing screen Display hide of notes can be switched by selecting View gt Note Section 2 2 4 9 12 9 2 5 Modifying and deleting notes 9 3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes 9 3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes STATEMENTS NOTES H o o o lt This section explains how to batch edit statements and notes Restrictions Batch editing of statements and notes cannot be performed when function blocks or inline structured text are used program Screen display Select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement Note Batch Edi
146. Notes Modifying statements and notes Modify statement or note Operating procedure 1 Select a statement or note to be modified Statement Note Batch Edit Line Statement P Statement I Statement Note Step Line Statement Djlstatement1 15 Statement2 1 Select 6 TE None In PLC Statement Mote In Peripheral Statement Note Move In PLC C InPeripheral Change Type Insert Row Add Row Display Ladder Bottom Display in Navigation Window Delete Row Find Top Bottom 2 Modify the statement or note PE statements 1 62 Statement5 Changing the type of statements and notes Change the or Peripheral type of a statement or note Operating procedure 1 Select ran ge in which the type Is Statement Note Batch Edit C h a n 0 Line Statement P Statement I Statement Note Line Statement 2 Select the statement note type In L C di r l n P e ri p h e ra l None In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note Edit en just How InPeripheral Change 3 Click the change type button NUR _ ter The type is changed Z me sten A symbol is appended to a statement or note met set as Peripheral Change from PLC to Peripheral i Oj statementi 1 15 Statement2 me 32 4
147. PU Phone Book ye 2 numbers of targets such as remote access LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Start the LCPU logging configuration tool Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool Start the Ethernet adapter module configuration tool Built in I O Module Tool Positioning Monitor Display the Positioning Monitor screen High Speed Counter Monitor Display the High Speed Counter Monitor screen I O Monitor Display the I O Monitor screen Check Intelligent Function Module Parameter Check the duplication of devices set in the Auto refresh Check Auto Refresh Duplication function and display the result Intelligent Function Module Tool Analog Module Offset Gain Setting Configure the offset gain setting of the analog module Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting Q61LD Default Setting Configure the Q61LD default setting Temperature Input Module Configure the Q61LD two point calibration setting Configure the offset gain setting of the temperature input Offset Gain Setting module Temperature Control Module Auto Tuning Execute the auto tuning function of the temperature control module Execute the sensor correction function of the temperature Sensor Correction Function control module Counter Module Execute the preset function of the counter module QD75 LD75 Positioning Module Execute the positioning monitor Execute the positioning test Execute the wave trace Execute the location trace
148. Peripheral 9 21 i erp dE EPIS 10 3 Checking for Errors and Warnings 10 18 Class 5 4 5 9 5 11 Close B NN 6 6 Close 6 6 s EE 6 6 OU 2 8 LO EL TT 5 4 5 9 5 11 5 20 comment that is appended _ 9 3 We NR T 10 8 Compile Condition pp 13 5 Compiling MERE UT 10 5 10 7 Conditions of Monitoring 12 4 Consecutive entry button 6 7 Consistency pair check 10 3 Constant 2 2 000022 2 5 4 5 9 5 11 5 20 sspe M PI 6 6 control SFC type 2 7 46 7 47 Converting ladder blocks 10 2 Go NE ER 6 47 NU 5 29 current values pp 12 4 SOR E 2 3 EE A eee eee 6 47 Cutting Copying and Pasting SFC Diagrams 7 30 INDEX 2 D DAA sunne 5 21 5 23 Data Type 5 4 5 9 5 11 5 15 5 16 5 20 5 21 5 23 Data Type Selection screen 5 15 5 16 Delete Column
149. Point Creating new structured data Create structured data using the Project view 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operation Manual Common 5 20 9 6 1 Setting data type of structure 5 6 Setting Structured Data Labels 5 6 2 Setting data type as structure define the data type of label as structure set a structure in the data type entry field on each label setting screen In addition to direct text entry structure be selected on the Data Type Selection screen 2 Section 5 5 3 OVERVIEW 5 6 3 Assigning devices to structured data type labels Devices of the structured data type global labels are set on the Structure Device Setting screen If the structure is set for data type on the Global Label Setting screen Detail Setting is displayed in the Device column Click Detail Setting to display the Structure Device Setting screen Screen display Click Detail Setting on the label setting screen SCREEN Gd CONFIGURATION Global Label Setting Global1 Class Label Name Data Type VAR GLOBAL v Transport Complete Bit 36 VAR GLOBAL JEmargency Stop Switch Bit jl VAR GLOBAL CONSTANT _ Control Bt TT VAR GLOBAL Product A Data Stuc Betalsettng Constant Device 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE 4 System Label Operation CE pes Per Structure Device Setting Produc
150. Point Monitoring devices in MELSAP L Use the Watch windows to monitor devices in MELSAP L For the method to monitor devices registered in the Watch windows refer to the following manual 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common J Z LU gt 9 LU STATEMENTS NOTES Displaying start destination blocks Display the start destination block when there is block start step on the SFC diagram being monitored Operating procedure CONVERTING ma TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING PROGRAMS Move the cursor to the block start step and select View gt Open Zoom Start Destination Block The start destination block is displayed lt x Q T LLI ae c Point Another method for displaying start destination blocks A start destination block can be also displayed by double clicking the block start step while pressing the cte key N CONTROLLER CPU MONITORING Auto scroll monitoring Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when they are out of the screen during monitoring Operating procedure 1 Select Online gt Monitor gt SFC Auto Scroll 2 CD 2 O D O O lt LLI 2 Select Online gt Monitor Start Monitoring E While the auto scroll monitor function is activated active steps are scrolled on to the screen automatically when they are out o
151. R PROGRAMS program component Step is established Write a Stat ee complicated OM70 7 interlock condition Ascent i on the ladder 1 Ascent Ascent end Descent position er oM80 Descent EDITING SFC 5 2 Descent end position Machine operation sequence Machine controls Q 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS Create programs using only the SFC editor window when displaying SFC programs in MELSAP L Both operations of editing SFC diagrams and creating operation output transition condition programs are performed on the SFC editor window MELSAP L instruction format format to describe control instructions and transition conditions in steps on the SFC diagram Control programs and transition conditions can be checked on the SFC diagram MELSAP L start conditions format format to describe start conditions and transition conditions in steps on the SFC diagram Operation outputs OUT and transition conditions LD LDI can be easily entered using only devices labels and they can be checked on the SFC diagram MELSAP L instruction format MELSAP L start conditions format PRG 000 Block5 SEE PRG 000 Block5 2 aLabel4 350 0 10 oLabel4 7 3 Creating 5 Diagrams 7 3 Creating SFC Diagrams This section explains how t
152. ROGRAMS Wrapping destination symbol gt EE Point Ow Changing the number of contacts displayed ladder program S 5 The number of contacts 9 11 13 17 or 21 displayed single row be changed lt Section 2 2 7 a lt TO amp 5 mg N tX 6 2 7 Creating wrapping rows 6 17 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 3 Using Function Blocks This section explains how to utilize function blocks as components in sequence programs To use function blocks select Use Label when creating a new project 6 3 1 Creating function blocks Create a function block Operating procedure 1 Create a new function block For the procedure for adding new data in a project refer to the following manual s GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common The function block program file and the function block label setting file are added to the project Navigation CP 231 55 2 tx Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Global Label Program Setting POU a Program 28 MAIN Function block FB Pool program file ADD 1 sk Program Local Label Structured Data Types Function FB label Local Device Comment setting file Device Memory Device Initial value 2 Set the function block label The created function block can be used as component 2 Section 5 4 3 Edit the function block ladder
153. Reference Common Password Keyword men programmable controller CPU PLC Memory Operation Pen PLC User Data the program memory data the programmable ammon Program Memory Batch Download Latch Data Backup standard ROM Common PLC Module Change e Common Register Cancel Display Module Menu 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 3 List of Functions Online common function Reference Monitor Switch the mode of the open window to Monitor Mode Monitor Mode PORE during monitoring Switch the mode of th indow to Monitor Writ Monitor Write Mode witc mode of the open window to Moni or Write Mode during monitoring Start Monitoring All Windows Start monitoring of all open windows C ommon Stop Monitoring All Windows Stop monitoring of all open windows Start Monitoring Start monitoring of the open window Section 12 1 Stop Monitoring Stop monitoring of the open window Display the current device value in decimal in program Change Value Format Decimal monitoring Section 12 3 1 Display the current device value hexadecimal in program Change Value Format Hexadecimal monitoring Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor device buffer memory in batch Program List Monitor the processing time of programs being executed Common Interrupt Program List Monitor the number executions of interrupt programs Change Instance Fun
154. SAP L MELSAP3 MELSAP L PRG 001 Block7 1 7 13 Precautions on Creating Programs MELSAP L 8 When a program created in MELSAP L instruction format is displayed in MELSAP L start conditions format the following operation outputs transition conditions are displayed in marks Operation outputs which include the instructions other than OUT Transition conditions which include the instructions other than LD AND OR LDI ANI ORI When marks are displayed change the format to MELSAP L instruction format and check the ladder Programs created in MELSAP L instruction format cannot be modified or monitored in MELSAP L start conditions format however a CPU processes them normally To modify and monitor programs in MELSAP L start conditions format after they are checked in OVERVIEW 2 MELSAP L instruction format delete programs displayed marks the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen and enter them again MELSAP L start conditions format 24 GO LL LL MELSAP L instruction format PRG 000 Block2 3 6 Datal Data 070 K120 ole OO c X na PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Q 2 lt c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 14 Changing
155. SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 5 5 3 Selecting data types 5 15 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Point amp Method for displaying the Data Type Selection screen The Data Type Selection screen can be opened by any of the following operations when is in the selected status Press the Enter key Press the Space key Press the 2 Setting arrays for data type Define the data type as an array To define data type as an array set the items in the Array Element field on the Data Type Selection screen 1 Click the data type entry field on each label setting screen Data Type Selection Libraries Data Type 2 Check the check box in the Array condoned wo Double Word Signed Element field Word Unsigned Bit Strina 16 bit Av E String 32 bit Precision 3 Enter the number of elements in the String 32 Element field Lu Retentive Timer Class inter 4 Set the data type of the array element in jo ii Simple Types the same manner as setting the normal C Structured Data Types data type C Function Blocks Array Element ARRAY Element 4 change the offset To change the offset Array start value Array end value to a value other than 0 edit the offset value by directly entering the array type declaration in text on each label setting screen
156. STB on the Enter Symbol screen Enter Symbol ste OK Exit Help PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS An inline structured text box can be also inserted by pressing the cte keys A maximum number of inline structured text boxes that can be inserted is 100 per program and 400 per project SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 4 2 Inserting inline structured text box 6 27 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 4 3 Editing inline structured text program Edit an inline structured text program Operating procedure 1 Double click the inline structured text box or press the Enter key The inline structured text box becomes editing status T PRG Write MAIN 1 Step 2 Editthe inline structured text program The editing method of the inline structured text program is the same as that of the ST language For editing programs in the ST language refer to the following manuals lt gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project 3 MELSEC Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals 3 Click the area other than the inline structured text box or press the key The editing of the inline structured text program ends Point Editing inline structured text programs The editing status can be switched by pressing the 2
157. Select Edit gt Restore After Ladder Conversion The confirmation message is displayed MELSOFT Series GX Works AN This will abort the ladder editing and it will restore the ladder to status just after ladder conversion All right 2 Clickthe button The ladder is restored to the status before editing the ladder Status after ladder conversion x100 x200 x300 x400 Y100 4 Point Converted ladder cannot be restored to the status before conversion 6 14 Precautions Editing Ladders 6 14 Precautions on Editing Ladders The following explains the precautions on editing ladders OVERVIEW 1 Fora ladder with a ladder block consisting of two or more rows if one instruction cannot be fitted in a single row create wrapping symbols and create the instruction in the next row as shown below Example 2 enter the following instruction 2 ECALL abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw P1000 ZR111111 ZR222222 28333333 ZR444444 24 78555555 55 instruction that does not fit in a row cannot be entered in the row ee If attempted the error message Edit position is incorrect is displayed 3 AI me A3 SET 0 zu SET hl lt Q Sub routine calls 50221 Files OO ol _ Aa su Symbol E H1 22 21444444 SR 555555 Exit a MELSOFT Series GX Works X 1 Edit position is incorrect
158. Step No Q rr F Data Name Block v Block Ma jo 2 3 LL Jump Destination Step Reset Destination Step Replace or 5 NO Old Step 5 Old Step Ma Replace all New Step Mo 3 r Mew Step Mn T 3 Close Q z Y 2 Operating procedure ran O X X na 1 Setthe items on the screen Item Description Data Name Select the block data name Display the block number corresponds to the Data Name 2 lt jump Destination Siep Enter old and new SFC step numbers when replacing the jump destination SFC step s number lt 3 Enter an old SFC step number Ss co Old Step No Click to select from the list of jump destination step numbers used within the E block New Step Enter a new SFC step number MM Enter old and new SFC step numbers when replacing the reset destination SFC step N Reset Destination Step number m Enter an old SFC step number fr Old Step No Click to select from the list of reset destination step numbers used within the m 2 New Step Enter a new SFC step number 1 Not supported by FXCPU 2 Clickthe button The cursor moves to the searched SFC step number EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3 Click the _ Feleal button When the Xe button is selected the old step number at the cursor position is replaced with the new step number When the cursor i
159. The following message is displayed MELSOFT Series GA Works 6 Click the button OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Point amp Class setting When an item other than the class such as a label name or data type is set in a blank column VAR GLOBAL is automatically set for Class Change it if necessary Characters that be used for label names Any of the following label names causes an error at compilation A label name that includes a space A label name that begins with a numeral A label name which is same as the one used for devices For characters that cannot be used for label names refer to the following manual 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Specifying devices addresses The digit specified bit device KAMO or bit specified word device DO 1 can be specified for devices addresses Assigning devices automatically Devices are automatically assigned to labels which are not set devices when compiling a program The device assignment range can be changed on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting screen gt Section 5 7 The assigned devices can be checked with the cross reference
160. Window and Help and functions used for each editing and setting target Edit Find Replace Compile and View For Common Structured and Intelligent indicated in the Reference column refer to the following manuals respectively N35 OVERVIEW Common GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Structured GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project Intelligent GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module GO 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured 3 project o 2D ram This section explains the functions common to Simple project and Structured project ag x X List of common functions 2 2 The following tables show functions that are available regardless of the type of editing or setting target q lt Project common function Reference d 2 New Create a new project Q Open Open an existing project Close Close an open project Save Save project Save Name and save project a Compress Unpack Delete Delete an existing project Verify Verify between two project data Project Revision Revision Entry Register the project change history Display the list of project change history lt 2 Common og Change PLC Type Change the programmable controller CPU type 2 d Change the project type from Simple project without la
161. X Works2 Help screen App 2 7 Appendix 1 1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys Program Common toolbar icons The following table shows the Program Common toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys ee Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Cut Cut the selected data J Z LU gt 9 LU STATEMENTS NOTES jy K mare Copy the selected data the selected data Copy the selected data Section 6 11 the cut copied data at the cursor cu t Ctrl A Cancel the previous operation Section 6 12 Perform the operation canceled by i Undo Find Instruction Search for an instruction Common Search for a contact or coil Letni Att T 7 Find Contact or Coll corresponding a specified device Write to PLC Write data to the programmable controller CPU Chapter 11 Read from PLC Read data from the programmable controller CPU e CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU A ENE I PROGRAMS o lt x Q T LLI oc c zm Start Monitoring All Start monitoring all windows being P Windows opened zm Stop Monitoring All Stop monitoring all windows being 54 Windows opened Section 12 1 zB E Start monitoring the window being Start Monitoring operated
162. Zoom editor window when editing in MELSAP3 FXCPU Create operation output and transition condition programs on the Enter SFC symbol Enter Program screen when editing in MELSAP L 7 9 1 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP3 FXCPU Create operation output and transition condition programs in MELSAP3 FXCPU Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the SFC step transition where the program is created 2 Move the cursor to the Zoom editor window The editing operations on the Zoom editor window are the same as those of ladder editor 2 gt Chapter 6 PRG 000 Block SFC Block Title vs PRG 6 PRG 000 Block SFC Bloc PRG 000 Block Transition No 0 TR 7 34 7 9 1 Creating operation output transition condition programs MELSAP3 FXCPU 7 9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions Point Displaying SFC editor window and Zoom editor window By the following setting the Zoom editor window can be automatically displayed side by side when the SFC editor window is opened The display of SFC editor and Zoom editor can be selected from Tiling Horizontally or Tiling Vertically Select Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt SFC gt SFC Diagram gt Tile SFC and Zoom vertically When this setting is valid the setting of Open Zoom with New Window is invalidated Moving a cursor of the SFC editor window the Zoom editor windo
163. a specified line statement The corresponding line statement in the program is displayed by jumping from the list Screen display STATEMENTS NOTES H O o lt Select Find Replace Line Statement List 5 Line Statement List MAIN Find Conveyor Upward Search Downward Search Step Line Statement 0 Initialize 15 Process 27 Timer1 CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS 42 Conveyer1 Shift 62 Conveyer1 Stop Hollow out 79 Conveyer2 Shift 91 Conveyor2 Stop Roll 113 Initialize2 Line statement list lt x D zZ Q T LLI or 22 Refresh The list shows the latest information Operating procedure 1 Setthe items on the screen 2 Description is H Find Enter a character string of the line statement to be searched for Z n Click to select from the list of character strings searched previously 9 Line statement list Display a list of line statements used in the program Display step numbers to which the line statements are set Line statement Display line statements used in the program 2 Double click the selected row in the line statement list CD 2 O D O O lt The position jumps from the line statement list to the corresponding line statement the program editor Screen button o Upward Search 1 Downward Search
164. acters that cannot be used for label names refer to the following manual 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Assigning devices automatically Devices are automatically assigned to labels when a program is compiled The device assignment range can be changed on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting screen gt Section 5 7 The assigned devices can be checked with the cross reference function 2 gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common B Maximum number of input output labels The maximum number of input output labels can be used in a function block differs depending on programming languages When setting input output labels with local label setting of function block set within the number of the input output labels shown in the following table Programming Function block 4 4 Ladder language 1 to 24 1 to 24 Including I O labels Including I O labels ST language o Including I O labels 54 I O label is counted that each of input output labels is one label 5 5 Common Operations for Setting Labels 5 5 Operations for Setting Labels This section explains the common operations for each label setting editor OVERVIEW 5 5 1 Classes 2 84 m 29 Label classes indicate which POU how the label be used Selectable labels are different according to the type of label setting editor or The following table shows selectable labels
165. ad Write Online Change Symbolic Information Compile Intelligent Function Module iQ Works Interaction Explanation System Label Setting Operating procedure Back to System Default Set as User Default Describes the operating procedure of the function Operating procedure Setthe items on the screen Reference location When the cursor is placed on a setting item an explanation of the item is displayed on the Details of the setting items 037 Section 13 2 leads to the reference location and reference manual Screen button Back to System Default Restores the initial settings Back to User Default Restores the user default settings Screen button Describes the buttons in the screen Set as User Default Stores the current settings as the user default and applies them to new project 18 The following table explains the CPU module icons that indicate the function availability Icon QCPU Q mode FXCPU Normal icons indicate that the corresponding function Icons with asterisk symbol indicate that the corresponding function is available with restrictions Q CPU such as CPU types gt Icons with x symbol indicate that the corresponding CPU function is not available This manual also uses the following columns Description Point This explains notes requiring attention or useful functions relating to the information given on the same page Restric
166. adder SFC ST structured ladder FBD language Generic term for Simple projects that do not use labels Generic term for Simple projects that use labels and Structured projects Generic term for projects whose securities are set An input format to input mnemonic language in a ladder program aN MELSOFT 1 OVERVIEW N35 OVERVIEW 2 This manual describes the programming method using Simple project and the operation method of the related 2 functions x For the features and functions of GX Works2 refer to the following manual GO 2 7 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 58 3 xd OO OO c X na 1 1 Whatis Simple 1 2 1 2 Features of Simple 1 2 1 3 List 1 3 PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 What is Simple Project The Simple project is used to create sequence programs using instructions for Mitsubishi programmable controller CPUs Programs in Simple project can be created in a similar way with the existing GX Developer 1 2 Features of Simple Project The features of the Simple project are as follows Inheritance of operational performances and enhanced u
167. all FB instances of the same name in the program However note that FB instance names are case sensitive 6 22 6 3 4 Changing FB instance names of pasted function blocks 6 3 Using Function Blocks 6 3 5 Displaying function block ladder programs Open function block used in the ladder Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the function block OVERVIEW MELSOFT Series GX Works D project 02_OpeMan Simple Si06 03 05_1 g gt 0w PRG Write MAIN 60 Step t Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help 2 MGE De RER DE RER BUSES id kue a ud LOG OG du n ug er UR UG 0 6 x 84 209 LL cz OO NO LLI 2 D lt Q C OO PLUSZ W D200 ru na INCP D100 p200 END vi English Simple QD6H Host Station NLP PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 2 Select View gt Tile FB Horizontally The function block and its ladder program are displayed horizontally ME MELSOFT Series GX Works2 D project 02_OpeMan Simple Si06 03 05_2 av I Project Edit Find Replace Compile Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help 5 MS 25 3 3 53 T Bo F3 Step wj FB Write ADD U MAIN ADD U 1 iiid T PRG Write MAIN 60 Step a 0 12 i Y110 7 D1 ep SETTING LABELS WEPLUS 1 PLUS2 W D200 M10 49 NCP D100 RAT mann nnn Tq pw T FB Wr
168. all line statements are counted as the number of line statements on tree view gt lt 2 9 5 2 Displaying line statements tree view 9 23 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES 9 5 3 Disabling setting of line statements on tree view Change the setting of line statements on a tree view to hide Operating procedure Select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement 52 The statement entry mode is established 2 Move the cursor to a line statement on a tree view B Program Ti i pl MAIN X10 X11 X12 Program 71 Control 21525651 Automatic operation program Y71 rita processing A 1 Count the number of interrupt ag END To H Local Label Y73 Enter Line Statement 3 Press the Enter key The Enter Line Statement screen is displayed 4 Uncheck Display in Navigation Window or delete Title in front of the line statement 5 Click the ok button EB Program 6 Select Compile Build si Program 4j Control 21525651 The line statement is deleted from the tree aj Automatic operation program M ag Count the number of interrupt If there are no line statements on a tree view a program the END END i Local Label instructions are also deleted from a tree Point Precautions on deleting line statements on tree view When deleting the line statements on
169. amentals gt MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction gt User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals of the CPU module to be used Nes Note that data types are different according to the programming language ladder SFC ST The following table shows data types that can be used for each programming language O Applicable x Not applicable Daa Programming language Ladder SFC ST Bit Word signed Double word signed Word unsigned 16 bit string Double word unsigned 32 bit string Single precision real 1 Double precision real 2 OJOJOJOJO OJ OJOJ O String 2 Time Timer ek Counter Retentive timer OQ x Pointer 05 x 4 For FXCPU this item is supported by FX2N FX2Nc FX3G FX3U and FX3UC only 2 Supported by Universal model QCPU LCPU only 8 For FXCPU this item is supported by FX3u and FX3uc only 4 For FXCPU this item is supported by FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2Nc FX3G FX3U and FX3UC only 5 For ladder language these items cannot be used in an inline structured text program 5 14 2 9 2 Data types 5 5 Common Operations for Setting Labels 5 5 3 Selecting data types Select a data type To define a label a data type must be specified by directly entering the type in text or selecting it on the Data Type Selection screen Screen display Click in the data type entry field on each label setting screen OVERVIEW Data T
170. among the devices reassigned to labels clear the previous device values by the following procedure when adding changing labels 1 Add change labels only Do not edit the programs 2 Select Compile Build and compile the programs 3 Register added changed labels to the Watch window and clear the current values to 0 4 Edit the programs and select Compile Online Program Change Assigning devices to labels when compiling all programs All programs need to be compiled when the following operations are performed Changing the following PLC parameters 1 e Common Pointer No and Timer Limit Setting on the PLC System tab File Register and File for Local Device on the PLC File gt gt tab Settings on the lt lt Device gt gt tab e Changing the following option settings Default Length of String Data Type in Label Setting Editor Settings in Compile Changing automatically assigned devices Changing PLC type Changing project type Reading data from programmable controller CPU except for when reading symbolic information and parameters at the same time Reading data written to the programmable controller CPU by GX Developer Using Open Other Project function 10 14 10 3 3 Precautions on compilation 10 3 Compilation When all programs are compiled devices are reassigned to labels in all POUs If all the compiled programs are written to the programmable controller CPU and r
171. ams The following shows the example of entering Step comment at Block 0 SFC step 1 Transition comment is not supported by FXCPU Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt Documentation gt SFC Step Transition Comment The editing screen changes to the SFC comment editing mode 2 Move the cursor to the position where the SFC comment is entered 3 Press the Enter key Input Device Comment BLO S1 COMMENT The Input Device Comment screen is displayed cms 4 Enter the SFC comment Input Device Comment BLOXS1 COMMENT Eg The line wrapping of the SFC comment display can step commend Step Com be checked when the comment is entered ment mest 5 Click the 9 button The entered SFC step comment is displayed as shown on the right Point Disabling the SFC comment editing mode To disable the SFC comment editing mode select Edit gt Documentation gt Step Transition Comment again and uncheck the item Creating SFC comments SFC comments can be created on the Enter SFC Symbol screen when entering SFC symbols or by using the device comment editor When creating SFC comments on the device comment editor specify the device name as shown below SFC comment QCPU Q mode LCPU FXCPU SFC step comment BLm Sn Sn Transition comment BLm TRn m Block number n SFC step transition number Saving SFC comments The created SFC comments are saved in the
172. an instance name when program of FB instance is displayed on program Instance name Title Display when is set on the property Display in the following cases e When write protection is set with the security setting Read only display e When program is a device display gt Section 2 2 8 e When the mode is switched to the read mode or the monitor mode with the ladder edit mode Display the number of steps of program Number of steps Display with the parentheses for the programs with function block or uncompiled status Compilation status Display when program of project with labels is uncompiled lt Title bar example of program gt T MC N1 PRG Read MAIN Title of program Read Only 27 Step lt Title bar example of FB instance opened in program gt m FB Write U_FB1 SUB1 U_FB1_1 Title of U_FB1 2 Step 2 4 2 2 1 Editing screen 2 2 Ladder Editor Nesting number of master control When the cursor position is on the nesting of master control the nesting number of master control is displayed on a title bar The nesting number of innermost master control is displayed a master control with nesting architecture The following figure shows the range where the nesting number of master control is displayed NG OVERVIEW 2 E Range of master Display the nesting control NO number NO appe A 49 T 5 Displa
173. application instruction unit of instruction ve Operating procedure 3 1 Move the cursor to the position where the instruction is deleted 9 2 0 100 Oo d 2 Press the Delete key The instruction is deleted x100 3n 100 8 END v PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Point Deletion in the Insert mode If the instruction is deleted in the Insert mode the instructions that follow the deleted instruction are shifted forward With wrapping lines the instructions are shifted when the ladder is converted ep SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER 44 PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 7 1 Deleting contacts coils and application instructions in unit of instruction 6 35 Er GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 2 Deleting contacts coils and application instructions by setting a range Delete contacts coils and or application instructions by setting a range Operating procedure 1 Set the range by dragging the cursor from the start position of deletion 2 Press the Deiete key The instructions in the set range are deleted Point The range can be set by pressing the keys gt Lsn BE 6 36 6 7 2 Deleting contacts coils and application instructions by setting a range 6 7 3 6 7 Deleting Contacts Coils and Application Instructions Deleting a ladder block Dele
174. apter explains how to write read sequence programs to from the programmable controller CPU or memory card CONVERTING eee TEN COMPILING E PROGRAMS For the overview of the data write read operation refer to the following manual K gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common WRITING READING DATA oz LLI 474 11 1 Writing Reading Data to from Programmable Controller CPU 11 2 MONITORING s CD 2 O D O O lt LLI INDEX APPENDIX gt 11 1 Er GX Works2 11 WRITING READING DATA TO FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 1 Writing Reading Data to from Programmable Controller CPU This section explains how to write the Simple project data to the programmable controller CPU or memory card and how to read the data from the programmable controller CPU or memory card to the project Symbolic information can be written to read from a programmable controller CPU for projects with labels of FX3U FX3UC version 3 00 or later only Screen display Select Online gt Write to PLC 59 Read from PLC lt Write to PLC screen for the project without labels gt Online Data Operation Connection Channel List Serial Port PLC Module Connection LISB System Image Read Write C verify C Delete Setting target PLC Module Intelligent Function Module Execution Target Data No Yes modu
175. as the compilation and program check Content Display descriptions of errors and warnings Error Code Display error code numbers Status Display the total number of errors and warnings 10 18 10 4 Checking for Errors Warnings 10 4 1 Correcting errors and warnings Check and correct errors warnings EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES Operating procedure 10 1 Double click the error warning message displayed in the Output window The corresponding error location in the program is displayed Output Rebuild All No Result Data Name Class Content Error Code 1 Error MAINI Program compile switch has not been defined C9500 2 SUB1 Program compile Operations Ww2 has not been defined C9500 CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE fe HENI PROGRAMS h Error 2 Warning 0 Check Warning 0 WRITING READING DATA CONTROLLER CPU Module Ready H 2 Check the corresponding error location and correct the error as instructed by the error warning message CD 2 O D O O lt INDEX APPENDIX gt 10 4 1 Correcting errors and warnings 10 19 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS MEMO 10 20 10 4 1 Correcting errors warnings aN MELSOFT J Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES 11 WRITING READING DATA FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU This ch
176. at MELSAP L Start Conditions Format Display Display SFC in MELSAP L start conditions format Display the Zoom editor window or the start destination block Display the SFC block of the start source Open Zoom Start Destination Block Back to Start SFC Block Open the setting screen of labels set for the program being Open Header edited 1 3 4 List of functions for editing SFC block list The following tables show the functions for editing SFC block list Find Replace function for editing SFC block list Jump Move the cursor to the specified block number Block Information Find Device Search for a device View function for editing SFC block list SFC Block List Comment Display comments of the SFC block list Device Display Open SFC Body Open Header Display devices Open the SFC diagram Display the label setting screen 1 3 5 List of functions for Structured project Reference Section 7 7 Section 9 8 Reference Section 8 2 1 Section 8 2 2 Section 8 2 4 Reference Section 2 3 3 Section 2 3 4 Section 2 3 2 Section 2 3 5 Section 7 11 Section 2 3 6 Section 7 9 Reference Section 8 2 5 Section 8 2 6 Reference Section 7 11 1 Section 7 11 2 Section 7 11 3 Section 7 11 4 For the functions for editing in the ST structured ladder FBD language refer to the following manual 2 gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project 1 3 4 List of functions for editing SFC
177. atement list 4 PROGRAM Program configuration Q1 fee det Function block FB Write program in the desired programming language Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Define labels Section 5 4 Define structured data type s Section 5 6 ZMDevieMemory L gt Common j Device Initial Value 71 SETTING LABELS 1 For FXCPU this item is not displayed 84 2 For FXCPU no classification for program execution type Only Execution Program is m displayed 5 5 2 3 For FXCPU simple project with labels the Execution Program be divided into multiple EO projects 7 flag Program Setting EHE Execution Program i i MAIN je MAIN ai Program Jet Local Label SG MAINI B Program y Local Label Elie MAINZ he Program ig Local Label 4 When Tree Display is set for a line statement list the line statement list is displayed on a tree view 037 Section 9 5 1 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS MEMO aN MELSOFT 5 SETTING LABELS This chapter explains how to set labels 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 Label Setting 5 2 Setting 5 3 Setting Local Labels for Programs 5 9 Setting Local Label
178. bels e Change Project Type to Simple project with labels or from Simple project with labels to Structured project 7 Object New Add data to a project 2 Or 2 Set as Default Connection Specify data in selected connection target as connection 3 target for regular use Property Display the selected data properties 2 lt TO Si nr 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 3 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW Project common function Intelligent Function Module New Module Delete Module Property Add new intelligent function module data Delete intelligent function module data Display properties of an intelligent function module data Save data of the positioning module selected on the Project Save the Positioning Module Data view to a file Read from the Positioning Module Data Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Open Other Data Open Other Project Read ASC Format File Import GX Configurator QP Data Export to GX Developer Format File Save an open project in GX Developer format Read data from the positioning module and reflect it to the positioning module selected on the Project view Display a list of set unset parameters of an intelligent function module Open a project created with GX Developer Read an ASC format file Read a project created with GX Configurator QP Library Create Create a new library Install Import a created li
179. block list aN MELSOFT NG OVERVIEW 2 5 CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the screen configuration of GX Works2 CONFIGURATION SCREEN QJ 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE 2 1 Overview of Screen Configuration 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 9 OFC EdItOEL 5 2 14 PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS O 0 0 2 og 20 EO 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE KS GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overview of Screen Configuration This section explains the main frame basic screen of GX Works2 that is displayed when it is started up The following screen shows main frame configuration in which work window and docking windows are displayed Screen display Title bar ci MELSOFT Series GX Works2 D project OpeSi E Si0 2 01 00 gxw PRG Write MAIN 329 Step Menu bar P Project Edit Find Replace Compile view Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help ne cot ER BESS RER IS IRR AEE gitt 4 PAP YE dt UA X ite dir utp MLD jer ure j F5 sF5 F6 sF6 F F8 F9 sF9 0 SF SF8 sar5 sak salo aFS caF5 Toolbar q Selection J All Parts md Kl 43 Function Block able
180. brary to the project Deinstall Reload Rename Delete a library from the project Update the library imported to the project Rename a library Open Enable editing of a library Close Disable editing of a library Change Password Set a password for a library Save As Name and save a project Save Save a library file Help Display help information of the library Security Change Password Change the password of the current login user Manage user information of the project SEP Manageme Add delete a user or change the user information Set the access authorization of each user related to Data Security Setting reading writing data Print Batch print multiple data in the project Print Preview Display a print preview of data to be batch printed Print Window Print the open screen Print Window Preview Display the print preview of the open screen Printer Setup Change the printer settings Display the recently used GX Works2 project paths and open the selected project Start GX Developer Start GX Developer from GX Works2 Exit Exit GX Works2 Recently used files 1 to 4 Edit common function 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project Reference Intelligent Common Intelligent Common Structured Common Reference 1 3 List of Functions Find Replace common function Reference Cross Reference Display the usage of selected device or label
181. c registration automatic registration destination while Monitor destination monitoring watch window Caution1 Cursor omman move will be slow when setting is enabled 2 Select FB instance for function block Structured PLC will be lengthened depending on the setting Character String Monitor Set the number of displayable characters to Setting monitor character string data QCPU LCPU FX3U C only Display Format of Monitoring Select whether to display monitored value in Value Decimal or Hexadecimal Select whether to monitor buffer memory and Monitor buffer memory and link b ST memory link memory during monitoring Scan time of 13 4 13 2 Option Setting List Select whether to display warning dialog 2 cu when detect a step that does not transfer Watchin EA even if specified time passes while 9 monitoring oe uS Select watch target program program file Section Target All Blocks Specify watch target block Mee Monitor SFC Specify the Block Specify watch target block ston Transition Watch Select whether to detect other step that p does not transfer while displaying warning 0 H Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES Monitor when Detected 2 9 dialog gt 2 Select whether to open corresponding ce e UT SFC window to monitor when the active Pepe 5 step transfers block start step n0 Read Write 037 GX Work
182. checked Device Comment Editor 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Select whether to copy the texts in the upper Automatic copy AnA Aree row after incrementing it when inserting a when inserting a row Low Section 5 5 4 Label Setting Editor Copy data type comment items Select if the data type comment and remark shall be object for auto copy Default Length of String Data Set the default string length for string data Section Type type 5 5 3 Parameter 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Structured Ladder FBD ST 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project Display Format of Monitoring Select the display format of the monitored Section Value value in decimal or hexadecimal 12 3 1 Monitor buffer memory and link Select whether to monitor buffer memory and memory Only applies to the link memory during Ladder monitoring Scan Section QCPU LCPU FX3U C time of PLC will be lengthened depending on 12 3 2 the setting PLS PLF instruction is displayed in GP DOS FXGP format Ladder monitor Section Only applies to the FXCPU FXGP WIN formats If it is not checked 1233 Ladder it is displayed GX Developer form Display lines for monitoring Select whether to display rows of the current Section current value value monitor during Ladder monitoring 12 3 3 Ladder block label or device contained in cursor will be registered to watch window in Set automati
183. controller CPU can be reduced by not monitoring the buffer memory and link memory For FXCPU this function is supported by FX3u and FX3uc only Operating procedure e Select Tool gt Options gt Monitor gt Ladder gt Operational Setting and check or uncheck the Monitor buffer memory and link memory item Operational Setting Monitor buffer memory and link memory Only applies to the QCPLI LEPU FX3LI C 12 3 2 Monitoring buffer memory and link memory 12 5 J H Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES CONVERTING ma TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING PROGRAMS WRITING READING DATA N CONTROLLER CPU MONITORING CD 2 O D O O lt LLI APPENDIX INDEX GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12 3 3 Switching to FXGP DOS FXGP WIN display format FXCPU Switch the GX Works2 display format to the FXGP DOS FXGP WIN display format by setting the option As either display is selected it does not influence the actual FXCPU operations Operating procedure Select Tool gt Options gt Monitor gt Ladder Operational Setting Monitor buffer memory and link memory QCPLI LEPU FX3U C Only FxGP format Ladder monitor FXCPLI Only B Comparing monitor display Example 0 PLS MO lt Monitor display for the PLS instruction gt GX Works2 format display FXGP DOS FXGP WIN format display
184. controller CPU to validate the check box 7 9 3 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP L start conditions format 7 39 OVERVIEW SCREEN Gd CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC co PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS Operation output programs MELSAP L start conditions format The following are the setting examples of operation output program MELSAP L description example Ladder example m Program Device Label to turn ON in activating step v10 x 334 Label Candidacy Display Target Data Local Label Block Execute online change after converting W Program Device Label to turn ON in activating step Y10 gl vii 12 m E Y12 Above Device Label Combination Label Candidacy Display Target Data Local Label Block v 113 Execute online change after converting WW B Transition condition programs in MELSAP L start conditions format The following are the setting examples of transition condition program MELSAP L description example Ladder example m Program Device Label that will be transition condition for next step fom vi Tran001 002 TranDU3
185. creen is displayed i i 9 enter horizontal line select Edit gt Ladder Symbol Horizontal Line Zw X Consecutive Number of rows or Consecutive Number of rows or z2 entry button columns entry button columns d D o Delete VLine E3 Enter HLine 1 to 10 X oa Stop at the connection point SKIT Lox ext 3 Set the items on the screen PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Name Description Allow consecutive entry of vertical or horizontal lines by changing the status Consecutive entry button nu Consecutive entry ON Ed Consecutive entry OFF Enter the number of rows or columns to be entered Number of rows or columns The applicable number of rows or columns to enter lines toward the down or right direction is displayed when the screen is opened Change the value as required SETTING LABELS Check this to stop data entry on a connecting point when the connecting points such as instructions or vertical lines exist while entering the horizontal lines for the columns entered to Number of rows or columns Stop at the connection point Set when entering the horizontal lines This item links with the Stop at the connection points Instruction Vertical Line when enter or delete horizontal line item under Tool gt Options Program Editor Ladder Ladder Diagram 4 Click the button The entered vertical line or horizontal line is displayed on t
186. cription Ladder symbol selection field Specify a ladder symbol Click El to display the list of ladder symbols Instruction device entry field Enter an instruction a device or a label 3 Click the button The cursor is moved to the specified device or label 8 2 8 1 1 Searching for devices labels 8 1 Searching for Replacing Data in Ladder Programs 8 1 2 Jumping to the specified step number Jump to the specified step number Screen display OVERVIEW Select Find Replace gt Jump 2 lt gt Operating procedure 52 rz M 25 1 jump destination step number Item Description Enter program step number for the jump destination Step Click to select from the list of ten step numbers entered previously a OO OO c c na 2 Click the button The cursor jumps to the specified step number Point Jump function On the program editor pressing a numeric key on the keyboard enables to display the Jump screen PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC lee PROGRAMS a 2 lt u LO P LLI LLI N X 8 1 2 Jumping to the specified step number 8 3 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 1 3 Changing the module start I O numbers Change the module start I O number used for the arguments of the FROM P TO P DFRO P and DTO P instructions whe
187. ction 12 3 3 12 2 12 2 Starting Stopping Monitoring of Function Blocks 12 2 Starting and Stopping Monitoring of Function Blocks J Z LLI O lt LLI STATEMENTS NOTES This section explains how to monitor function block programs Open the function block program to be monitored in advance Starting monitoring of function blocks 3 92 DE Start monitoring of the function block 520 Operating procedure 1 1 Select Online gt Monitor gt Change Instance Function Block M The Change Instance Function Block screen is displayed ERE 9 Change Instance Function Block 5 FB Instance List Ei 28 12 MONITORING 2 Select the FB instance to be monitored 3 Click the gt button CD 2 O D O O lt 4 Select Online Monitor Start Monitoring 24 The monitoring starts The display and executable operations during monitoring are the same as those of the program monitoring Section 12 1 Screen button o Clear Cancels the selected status of the FB instance and stops monitoring APPENDIX Stopping monitoring of function blocks Stop monitoring of the function block Operating procedure INDEX e Select Online gt Monitor gt Stop Monitoring 8 The monitoring stops 12 3 GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12 3 Changing Operating Condition
188. ction Block Select an instance of the function block to be monitored Section 12 2 SFC All Block Batch Monitoring Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC program Section 12 5 4 Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when SFC Auto Scroll they are out of the screen during monitoring Section 12 9 1 Watch Start monitoring the current values of registered devices Start Watching labels and intelligent function module Stop monitoring the current values of registered devices POSEN labels and intelligent function module Common Register Watch Register the selected devices labels to the Watch window Read local device data from the programmable controller Local Device Baton Redd save CPU and saves them to a personal computer in CSV format PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Debug common function Reference Start Stop Simulation Start stop simulation Display a list of the instructions and devices used in the Instructions Unsupported by Simulation program unsupported by the simulation function Modify Value For ladder and SFC Zoom programs change the ON OFF Common y status and values of devices and labels used in the program Forced Input Output Registration Register cancel the forced input output of the device X Y Cancellation Device Test with Execution Condition Register Device Test with Execution Condition Check Disable Register Device Test Register the device test with execution condition Ch
189. d SFC block list of SFC program Open the program editor to be monitored in advance The monitoring of the Zoom editor window is same as monitoring of ladder programs gt Section 12 4 12 5 1 Monitoring SFC diagrams Monitor active steps inactive steps and steps being on hold on the SFC diagram Starting monitoring of the SFC diagram Start monitoring of the SFC diagram Operating procedure Select Online Monitor gt Start Monitoring 28 The monitoring starts MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Unset Project SER I Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window ADTA ER Ej S 00 et dn 25 HS ECT Bite 8 PRG Monitor Executing 000 p D X 4b A PRG Monitor Exec DX f PRG Monitor Executing 000 Block Transition No 0 Read Only E 4100 Intelligent Function Module F Global Device Comment Global Label 4 1 5 1 B H gram Label E FB Pool me FB Pool Structured Data Types Local Device Commen Display contents Description Blue Active step White Inactive step Yellow 1 A step specified as a hold step and being on hold 54 Not supported by FXCPU 12 8 12 5 1 Monitoring SFC diagrams 12 5 Monitoring SFC Programs
190. d must be the same Using different data types at the connection causes an error at compilation The following are the six device types for function blocks Bit Data expressed by ON OFF Word signed Data expressed in 16 bits Double word signed Data expressed in 32 bits Single precision real Floating point data expressed in 32 bits Double precision real Floating point data expressed in 64 bits String Character string data expressed in ASCII code o IfFB instance is not registered on the Label Setting screen when utilizing the function blocks to the ladder the information of function block name change and function block deletion are not applied to the label setting and ladder In this case delete the function blocks in the ladder manually and utilize the function blocks again 6 24 6 3 6 Precautions on using function blocks 6 3 Using Function Blocks 6 When the label setting of function block is changed compile the program or all programs The change of input output label is applied to the utilization destination ladder during compilation Note that the change is not applied when the FB instance is not registered in the global label setting or local label setting lt Example of function block before changing label settings gt OVERVIEW 153 1 10 3 z D11 O 5 PLUS per gt 2 pe 56 eo Label settings of function block 3 1 i i 2 Switch input labe
191. d series transition symbol is displayed lt Overwrite mode gt 20 70 Enter transition 1 71 Insert mode Enter transition 3 A vertical line is inserted automatically to the other divergence 7 14 7 3 3 Entering series transitions 7 3 Creating 5 Diagrams 7 3 4 Entering selection divergences Enter a selection divergence Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Move the cursor to the position where selection divergence is entered 2 2 Select Edit gt SFC Symbol Selection Divergence 8 Q The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen is displayed in nf accordance with the display format setting 29 Number of divergences 3 Enter SFC Symbol 9 Zy D F OO OO ru na 3 Set the items on the screen 2 Item Description lt Symbol Select D 5 3 Number of divergences Enter a number of columns of divergence line 2 Step Attribute This setting is not required This setting is not required 5 Comment This setting is not required 4 Click the button The entered selection divergence symbol is displayed lt Overwrite mode gt ag Enter selection 20 divergence lt Insert mode gt SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Enter selection divergence EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Q 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 7 3 4 Entering selecti
192. der symbol entry error The Instruction Help screen can be displayed automatically by the following setting Select Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder gt Ladder Diagram and check the Display Instruction Help at symbol error occurrence item 6 10 6 2 1 Entering contacts coils and application instructions 6 2 Entering Instructions 6 2 2 Instruction help The following explains the help function that supports entering ladder symbols The help function can be used on the ladder editor only Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Click the button on the Enter Symbol screen The Instruction Selection gt gt tab on the 5 Instruction Help screen is displayed A 7 je EIK c 40 LL LL 2 Select the instruction type in the Type Instruction Help lt Lis t Instruction Selection Find Instruction CD O The instructions of the selected type are displayed het Operation BD 3 ii ata Transfer E Instruction List E Program Run Canti ENDE O For details of the lt lt Find Instruction gt gt tab refer to 2 the Point Converts BCD data te by 5 to BIN data and stores at the device designated by D lt Q 25 3 Select an instruction from the Instruction List The information of the selected instruction is nn displayed in the instruction detail field PROGRAM Q1
193. device comment data To recover SFC comments when reading SFC programs from the programmable controller CPU write read device comments to from the programmable controller CPU aN MELSOFT 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS This chapter explains how to convert compile created programs Programs are converted compiled to sequence programs that can be executed on the programmable controller CPU 10 1 For Projects without Labels 10 2 For Projects with Labels 10 3 10 4 Checking for Errors and Warnings 10 1 J Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES e CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS E TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE WRITING READING DATA CONTROLLER CPU MONITORING s CD 2 O D O O lt LLI INDEX APPENDIX gt GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 1 For Projects without Labels This section explains how to convert ladder block created in the project without labels The ladder conversion confirms edited content of the ladder block 10 1 1 Converting created programs Convert created program Operating procedure Select Compile gt Build The unconverted ladder block is converted YSS 2 v MOS K1000 D2287 i ji Unconverted ladder ium block is displayed TO HO D12
194. e SFC step transition Section cet E51 155 2 3 4 E Leta Ic Ctrl Open Zoom Start Display the Zoom editor window or the Destination Block start destination block Back to Start SFC Block Display the start source block the start source block B ER programs on the SFC diagram Section _Ctri Program Display when editing in MELSAP L 23 3 B SFC block list shortcut keys The following table shows the shortcut keys for the SFC block list Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference em Jump to the specified block number data 8 2 1 Ctrl SFC Block List Comment Display comments of the 5 block list Section 7 11 App 14 Appendix 1 7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys Appendix 1 8 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I O system setting function The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the I O system setting function oes Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference J Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES eee 1 al 5 x al meme NN Paste the cut copied data at the cursor mm pe gt Lj Execute System Execute the system setting function 0 Setting and starts simulation Lo Disable 1 System Setting Disable the execution of the system sett
195. e array type global labels on the Structure Device Setting screen When VAR GLOBAL is set for Class and the structure array is set for Data Type on the Global Label Setting screen Detail Setting is displayed in the Device column Click Detail Setting to display the Structure Device Setting screen Screen display OVERVIEW 2 Click Detail Setting on the label setting screen 2 lt s Global Label Setting Global Z Class Label Name Data Type Constant Device Comment Remark Relation with System System Label Name Attribute B LLI 9 1 VAR GLOBAL Transport Complete Bit m 2 VAR GLOBAL v Emageny Stop Switch Bt T 3 GLOBAL CONSTANT w Temperature Control TRUE nO 4 VAR GLOBAL v Prduct A Data Structl S 5 VAR GLOBAL Stuctll0 9 1 3 11 4 NEN EEUU E System Label Operation To reflect the changes of the table above to the a rmi Chan ea IF Register system label database Structure Device Setting Device Name please save the project after compiling Structure Array Product B Data Struct1 10 gt D gr t Label Name Data Type Device lt STRUCT1_datal Word Signed ag LLI OO ISTRUCTI data Bt OO c c STRUCT data5 FLOAT Single Precision na Structure Array Offset Value
196. e line uses step E A symbol is prefixed to the entered text automatically gt lt Q z GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES 9 2 2 Entering statements Enter line statements P statements and I statements Entering line statements Enter a line statement Item Toolbar Statement ec Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement 53 The statement entry mode is established 2 Move the cursor to the left end of the ladder block where a line statement is entered X44 CALL PO 1 2 x4 x5 3 Press the Enter key The Enter Line Statement screen is displayed Enter Line Statement mpe OK 4 Select the statement type In PLC or In In Peripheral Display in Navigation window Ext Peripheral PLC statement is not supported by FXCPU 9 Enter a line statement Enter Line Statement In PLC Initial Process 6 Check Display in Navigation Window to E In Peripheral 7 Display in Navigation Window display a line statement on tree view of the Navigation window Title is entered in front of the line statement This function is not supported by FXCPU projects without labels Click the button The entered line statement is displayed on the editing screen When In Peripheral is selected is automatically prefixed to the line statement When di
197. e programmable controller CPU to STOP MONITORING s 2 Select Online Write to PLC and write programs to the programmable controller CPU 3 Select Online 2 PLC Memory Operation Clear PLC Memory to clear the device memories CD 2 O D O O lt LLI The remote RUN function when writing data to programmable controller CPU after all the compiled programs can be disabled by setting the following option Check Turn PLC to STOP at time of write after executing Rebuild All and do not execute remote RUN under Tool gt Options gt PLC Read Write INDEX APPENDIX gt 10 3 3 Precautions on compilation 10 15 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS Modification of global labels and function blocks If global labels and or function blocks are modified multiple programs become the compilation targets Write all program files of the compilation targets to the programmable controller CPU to apply the modifications Example Compiling programs after modifying Function block 1 in the following program configuration Function block 1 is compiled and the program files MAIN and SUB1 are modified Program configuration of the Simple project Compilation target Program Sequence Function MAIN block 1 Sequence Function SUB1 block 1 Function block 1 Function block 1 is used in the program files MAIN
198. e the cursor to the statement to be modified and press the Enter key The Enter Symbol screen is displayed Modify the statement as shown below Do not delete pointer number or interrupt pointer number when modifying a statement Enter Symbol When changing to Peripheral enter after When changing Peripheral to PLC delete postfixed to Auto Operation statement Line statement P statement Displaying statements on the editing screen Display hide of statements be switched by selecting View gt Statement Section 2 2 4 Deleting statements Delete a line statement P statement or statement Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the statement to be deleted Auto Operation 9 t PO 1 2 x3 x4 x5 91 HH 2 Press the Deiete key The statement is deleted x44 CALL FO 1 2 x4 xD xB 91 EF FF FF OI Point Displaying statements on the editing screen Display hide of statements be switched by selecting View gt Statement 03 Section 2 2 4 9 8 9 2 3 Modifying and deleting statements 9 2 Editing Statements and Notes 9 2 4 Entering notes Enter note in the program Item Toolbar STATEMENTS NOTES a H O o lt Note mat Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt Documentation Note The note
199. e the same program as before deleting the inline structured text box The devices to be assigned automatically are changed when a program is compiled Therefore verifying the re pasted project may cause the verification inconsistency 1 Re paste is to create or paste the same data as deleted inline structured text box 6 30 6 4 5 Precautions on using Inline structured text function 6 5 Moving Cursor to Start of Ladder Block 6 5 Moving Cursor to Start of Ladder Block This section explains how to move cursor from the current position to the start of the next previous ladder block OVERVIEW Operating procedure Z O Select Find Replace gt Jump to Next Ladder Block Start Jump to Previous Ladder c Block Start 29 cursor moves to the start of the ladder block or 2 eo Example When jumping to the start of the next ladder block 3 The cursor moves to the start of the next ladder block PRG MAIN PRGJ CD DFRO HO H2 DO DTOP HO T Q O O DTOP H0 H16 K2000 K O O ro SET M Aa Y4 DFRO HO H2 DO KI SET _ DY0 DFRO H0 H2 LRST DY0 6 gt Moving a cursor The cursor can be also moved to the start of the next previous ladder block by pressing the Ctr Att PgDown PgUp keys PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS
200. eck disable the registration of device test with execution EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS with Execution Condition condition Common Pah 5806 DEVICE Cancel the device test with execution condition in batch Execution Condition Sampling Trace Open Sampling Trace Display the Sampling Trace screen Common Scan Time Measurement Measure the scan time of a desired section 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project T OVERVIEW SCREEN Gd CONFIGURATION 9 lt lt D 9 O 2 A PROCEDURE SETTING LABELS EDITING SFC GO PROGRAMS 2 lt T c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW Debug common function Step Execution Stop Cancel Stop the step execution Cancel the step execution Break Execution Execute the break execution Step Execution Execute the step execution Execution Option Display the Execution Option screen of the step execution Break Setting Set Cancel Break Point a point at the cursor position or cancel the set Enable Disable Break Point Cancel All Break Points Break Point Window Cancel All Break Devices Enable disable the break point at the cursor position Cancel all break points Display the Break Point window Cancel all break devices Break Device Window Skip Setting Set Cancel Skip Range Enable Disable Skip Range Cancel All Skip Ranges Display the Break Device window
201. ected lines are displayed in yellow 4 The lines are deleted upon completion of dragging 5 To end the Delete Line function select Edit gt Delete Line 15 again The line deletion mode is disabled 6 38 6 8 1 Deleting lines 6 8 Deleting Lines 6 8 2 Deleting vertical or horizontal lines Delete a vertical or horizontal line Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the start of the vertical or horizontal line to be deleted The vertical line is deleted taking the left edge of the cursor as base point x100 2 v100 OVERVIEW Z O Y200 5 Y300 2 9 END e 2 Select Edit gt Ladder Symbol gt Delete Vertical Line 3 The Delete VLine screen is displayed 0 To delete a horizontal line select Edit gt Ladder Symbol gt Delete Horizontal Line 25 Zu Consecutive Deletion number of rows Consecutive Deletion number of rows z2 entry button or columns entry button or columns d oa Delete HLine 1 to 10 Delete VLine Exit Stop at the connection point 3 Set the items on the screen PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Description Allow consecutive deletion of vertical lines by changing the status Consecutive entry button zn El Consecutive entry ON Consecutive entry OFF Enter the number of rows or columns to be deleted The applicable number of rows or columns to delete lines toward the down or
202. ection ados Vertical Line Insert a vertical line 7310 No Attribute Set the step attribute to No Attribute Stored Coil Set the Set the step attribute to Stored attribute to Stored Coil 1 3 Stored Operation without Setthe step attribute to Stored Transition Check SE Section 7 5 zE Ct Stored Operation with Set the step attribute to Stored Operation Transition Check ST Reset the step attribute O lt c O Z O n ni 3 FRIES nU E zh gt el E in E gt SETTING OPTIONS i Alt FET Vertical Line Draw Line Insert ats at the cursor position Selection Divergence od 7 Draw Line i Insert at the cursor position Simultaneous Divergence Alt F8 Draw Line Insert r at the cursor position rd Selection Convergence Alt m Fo Draw Line gt Insert 372 at the cursor position Simultaneous lt zd F10 Convergence Draw Line Insert at the cursor position ts Ctrl Fo Delete Line Delete a line at the cursor position Section 7 4 Ta re Edit the SFC step transition comments Section 9 8 Comment Sort SFC Step No Sort the SFC block step numbers Section 7 7 gt lt am SFC Block Batch Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC Section Monitoring program 12 5 4 lt Appendix 1 7 Toolbar icons shortcut keys
203. ed for each compilation To reduce compilation processing time select Convert the selected program first and select Execute compile after conversion after all changes are made in a program Compiling programs when adding changing labels For precautions on compiling programs when adding changing labels refer to Section 10 3 3 10 6 10 2 1 Converting compiling created programs 10 2 For Projects with Labels 10 2 2 Compiling all programs Batch convert compile all programs in the project Operating procedure ouo E zi zz zo Ok LL Oz Z KEE Gar 2 1 Select Compile gt Rebuild All The following message 15 displayed Uncheck the item if the duplicated coil check ladder check and consistency paring check are not performed after the compilation 10 MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Caution When executing Rebuild All automatically assigned devices will be re evaluated and devices may change In that case values From the previous program will remain in the previously assigned devices For safety ensure that device assignments match by clearing all device memory latched data and file registers CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE fe CONTROLLER CPU HENI PROGRAMS Check for duplicated coils perform consistency pair check and other ladder checks after Rebuild All is complete Are you sure you want to Rebuild All lt x D zZ Q T
204. ed on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting screen 2 gt gt Section 5 7 The assigned devices can be checked with the cross reference function lt gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 5 4 Setting Local Labels for Function Blocks 5 4 Setting Local Labels for Function Blocks This section explains how to set local labels for each function block Create new function block in advance For the method for creating new function blocks refer to the following manual GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common OVERVIEW 2 O rr Screen display 5 Select Project view gt POU gt FB Pool gt function block gt Local Label UT cz OO NO 5 Function FB Label za FB SYOKIKA FB i E 3 ee Constant Comment WwordSigned INSTANT addin Dae Wadivedt Ef VARINPUT input Variable 1 PP Z u VARINPUT Input Variable 2 Word Signed o VAR IN OUT Operation Pesut word Signed FB_output 5 D OO OO c X Operating procedure e Set the items on the screen Maximum number of Item Description characters Select a label class from the list displayed by clicking lt Section 5 5 1 Class PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS Ladder ST SFC 32 Label Name Enter a desired label name Input output label 16 Specify a data type from the Data Type Selection screen displayed by clicking Data Type lt gt Section 5
205. elected for Data Type 155 Set a specific device to be assigned to the label when VAR GLOBAL is selected for Class device is automatically assigned when the cell is blank Device 50 When the data type is Structure click the Detail Setting cell and set devices on the Structure Device Setting screen Section 5 6 3 Enter a label comment Comment 1 2 Comments can be displayed on the program editor by switching 1024 display hide of comments gt Section 2 2 4 Enter supplementary information for label comments This item is not displayed on the program editor Remark 1 2 1024 Displays the relation between the global label and system label Class Description Relation with System Disclose The global label is disclosed as a system label Label 3 The global label refers the system label which is BUS disclosed by another project Blank There is no relation with system label 3 Displays the name of the system label which relates to the global System Label Name label Displays the attribute of the system label which relates to the global 3 Attribute label 1 A new line can be inserted in a cell by pressing the ctr Enter keys 2 The compilation is not needed after editing 3 For FXCPU these items are supported by FX3G FX3U and FX3UC only 5 2 Setting Global Labels Screen button fecic For FXCPU this button is supported by FX3G FX3U and FX3UC only Updates the sys
206. en the cursor is placed on a step EDITING SFC lee PROGRAMS m Z zu 9 a o 8 2 2 Searching for jump with step number SFC diagram 8 7 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 2 3 Jumping to specified SFC step number block number on SFC diagram Jump to the SFC step number block number when the cursor is placed on the SFC diagram Operating procedure 1 Press the numeric key when the cursor is placed on the SFC diagram Step Mo Elock No Jump fs Step No t Block Mo Cancel 2 Set the items on the screen Item Description Display the number that is entered on the SFC diagram Enter SFC step number or block number of the jump destination Step No Select this to jump to the specified SFC step number Block No Select this to jump to the specified block number 3 Click the OK button When the Step No is selected the cursor moves to the specified SFC step number in the block being edited When the Block No is selected the SFC diagram of the specified block number is displayed 8 8 8 2 3 Jumping to specified SFC step number block number on SFC diagram 8 2 Searching for Replacing Data in SFC Programs 8 2 4 Replacing SFC step number on SFC diagram Replace a jump destination step number or reset destination step number in each block Screen display Select Find Replace gt Change SFC Step No OVERVIEW 2 Change SFC
207. ending order on the screen assigned from higher number of a device number of device range set on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting For pointer P devices are assigned in ascending order assigned from lower number of a device number lt x Q T LLI oc c Example lt Device automatic assign setting gt Set the following device range D device 8000 to 8191 MONITORING s lt Label setting gt CD Class Label Name Data Type 5 1 Word Signed b 2 word Signed 3 FLOAT Double Precision 4 Labal D FLOAT Double Precision IT CD Definition Example of devices to be Descending order INDEX APPENDIX gt 10 3 2 Assigning devices 10 11 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS Assigning multiple types of device automatically QCPU modeyLCPU Assign the devices in top down order on the label setting editor Devices are assigned in descending order assigned from higher number of a device number of device range set on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting When the number of devices is less than the number of devices required for one label devices are assigned in descending order of the next device s device range When the following label requires the devices which are within the above device range the previous devices which are not assigned are assigned Example
208. ent is deleted and the selected statement moves one step upward PRG MAIN Control 121525651 X44 0 Operation Preparetion The line stops when operatio Auto Operation Warning alarm for 5 secs at 0 57 Initial Process SM400 1144 4 Count Interruptions X15 131 Control 121525651 2544 Auto Operation Warring alarm for 5 secs at 1 14 Initial Process TO 56 Count Interruptions SM400 87 x15 105 STATEMENTS NOTES H o o o lt CD 2 O D O O lt APPENDIX INDEX GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES Searching for statements and notes Search for a statement or note Operating procedure 1 Statement Note Batch Edit Enter a statement or note to be searched for in the Find field Click the 7 lor button Line Statement Statement I Statement Note 0 15 Statement2 32 statements EE EEE Statement 45 Statement4 62 StatementS Line Statement Top Sta rts sea rchin g in th upwa rd direction None In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note from the selected position ees In PLC C InPeripheral Change Type Enter atom Starts searching in the downward JE Po di
209. entry mode is established CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS 2 Move the cursor to the coil or application instruction to which a note is appended x44 0 t PO 1 2 x5 xb 3 P9 M4 HJ Y 70 x10 x11 X12 X13 10 4 __ Y71 lt x D zZ Q T LLI ac 22 3 Press the Enter key The Enter Note screen is displayed The entered note is displayed on the editing screen When In Peripheral is selected is automatically prefixed to the note x44 0 PO Enter Note T 4 ou fe In PLC 72 Select the note type In PLC or In ae en Peripheral note is not supported by FXCPU 1 5 Enter a note Enter Hote 2 E Preparetion Confirmed 6 Clickthe button In Peripheral 2 Lu 42 lt Operation Preparation Confirmed gt a 2 19 a lt f To disable the note entry mode select Edit gt Documentation gt Note 2 again The note entry mode is disabled gt lt O 2 9 2 4 Entering notes 9 9 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES Point Notes be entered on the Enter Symbol screen Move the cursor to the coil or application instruction to which a note is appended and press the Enter key The Enter Symbol screen is d
210. eplace gt Block Information Find Device OVERVIEW Z Block Information Find Device O rr 2 Find Device Anale z 2 LL m1 Close 2 Find Direction Find Range 9 fe Head Displayed Data Only 3 Bown f Include Assigned Data C Lp L 2 D T Q Operating procedure 69 X X na 1 Setthe items on the screen Item Description Enter device to be searched for Find Device Click to select from the list of ten devices entered previously Select this to search for devices in the downward direction from Head the start of the program regardless of the current cursor position PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Select this to search for devices in the downward direction from the cursor position Find Direction Down U Select this to search for devices in the upward direction from P the cursor position Select this to search for devices only within the data that are Displayed Data Only being displayed Find Range SETTING LABELS Select this to search for devices including those assigned to Include Assigned Data labels 2 Clickthe button The cursor moves to the searched device EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC lee PROGRAMS O 2 P LLI LLI N X 8 2 6 Searching for devices on SFC block list 8 11 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE MEMO 8 12 8 2 6 Searching for devices on SFC block li
211. eplacing function to replace the module start I O numbers of intelligent function module devices 3 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common U2 G11 DO Module start I O number of intelligent function module device PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC fee PROGRAMS a 2 lt u LO P LLI LLI N X 8 1 3 Changing the module start I O numbers 8 5 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 2 Searching for and Replacing Data in SFC Programs This section explains how to jump to the specified SFC step number or block number using the SFC diagram or SFC block list of the SFC program For the operations of device search replace instruction search replace and open closed contact change functions refer to the following manual gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 8 2 1 Jumping to specified SFC step number transition number on SFC diagram Jump to the SFC step number transition number in the specified block when the cursor is placed on the SFC diagram Screen display Select Find Replace gt Jump Jump Data Name Block Black Ma 8 Step Transition Step No 2 Transition Operating procedure 1 Setthe items on the screen Item Description Data Name Select the block data name Block No Display the block number corresponds to the Data
212. equence program Sampling trace starts when the Trace start command SM801 is executed after executing Register Trace Common 42 Enable to the sampling trace from the peripherals l ak 152 2220 results to personal Delete all information including the device data registered Delete All Data and the sampling trace result displayed on the Sampling Trace screen PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt T c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 13 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 2 List of functions for editing in ladder language The following tables show the functions for editing with the ladder editor Edit function for editing in ladder language Reference Delete Delete the selected data Restore After Ladder Conversion Return a ladder being edited to the last converted status Section 6 13 Insert Row Insert row at the cursor position Delete Row Delete a row at the cursor position Section 6 9 Insert Column Insert column at the cursor position Delete Column Delete column at the cursor position NOP Batch Insert Insert an NOP in front of the ladder block at the cursor position Section 6 10 Batch Delete Batch delete NOPs in the program being edited Edit Line Enter a line at the cursor p
213. ered to any of the following programs Initial program Program program file Scan program O Wait program Fixed interval program No execution type Declared in the label setting editor Function block Not declared in the label setting editor Declared in the label setting editor Structure Not declared in the label setting editor O 10 3 1 Compilation target data when compiling all programs 10 3 Compilation 10 3 2 Assigning devices D 0 Assign the devices to the labels set on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting screen during SE compilation 285 For details of device assignment when inline structured text or ST is used and precautions refer to the following 10 gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project Assigning devices defined on the label setting editor to the labels CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU The following explains the device assignment to the labels defined on the label setting editor For global labels only labels whose Device is blank on the label setting editor can be assigned When both global labels and local labels are assigned global labels are assigned to devices first and then local labels are assigned to devices gt PROGRAMS Assigning only one type of device automatically Assign the devices in top down order on the label setting editor Devices are assigned in desc
214. escription Col Number Enter the number of columns Display the number of rows Line Number The value is changed automatically according to the specified number of columns 2 Click the button The SFC diagram is displayed according to the specified number of columns 2 3 6 Changing SFC display format Change the SFC display format For Simple project a display format can be selected for each program For Structured project a single display format is selected for a project This function is not supported by FXCPU Displaying programs MELSAP3 Set the SFC display format to MELSAP3 Select View gt MELSAP3 Display C lt PRG 000 Block Step No 1 Comment for Step 1 Sag 3 switch2 3 o MOV data01 M sr aa linet on 2 f 101 PRG 000 Block 2 20 2 3 5 Setting number of columns for SFC diagram display 2 3 5 Editor Displaying programs in MELSAP L instruction format Set the SFC display format to MELSAP L instruction format e Select View gt MELSAP L Instruction Format Display F PRG 000 Block2 NG OVERVIEW 6 MOV Datal Data2 oT0K120 SCREEN Od CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE Displaying programs in MELSAP L start conditions format Set the SFC display format to MELSAP L start conditions format Select View gt MELSAP L Start Conditions Format
215. etail Last Change Target Memory Size gt Detail File list 2010 08 05 16 08 09 Uncompiled 2010 08 05 16 08 09 Uncompiled 2010 08 05 16 08 09 Uncompiled 2010 08 05 16 05 57 Necessary Setting Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Memory Writing Size Free Yolume Use Volume OBytes 226 856 16 904Bytes Refresh capacity Related Functions Execute Close 3 Remote Set Clock PLC User Data Write Title Format PLC Clear PLC Memory Arrange PLC Operation Memory Memory 11 2 11 1 Writing Reading Data to from Programmable Controller CPU Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Connection Channel List Display the information on the set connection target Switch the setting target module Setting target module tab If the target data of write read exists the color of the tab name is displayed in blue PLC Module Set to write the data to the programmable controller CPU Set to write the data of the intelligent function module to buffer memory Intelligent Function Module 1 flash ROM of the intelligent function module GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Title Display the title of the target memory by clicking the Refresh button Display Size Check this to display Size in the file list and the memory capacity Select the data to be written read Select the memory from the
216. f the screen APPENDIX INDEX 12 5 1 Monitoring SFC diagrams 12 9 GX Works2 12 MONITORING Point Starting method for the auto scroll monitor function The auto scroll monitor function also can be started by selecting Online gt Monitor gt SFC Auto Scroll during monitoring When the auto scroll monitor function is disabled When Start Monitoring All Windows is selected while the auto scroll monitor function is being activated the setting of the auto scroll monitor function is disabled and normal monitoring starts When multiple steps are active in series For multiple active steps in series caused by the stored operation steps active steps close to initial steps are displayed when the auto scroll monitor function is activated Operations when setting options When the Open Zoom with New Window item is checked under Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt SFC Zoom and the auto scroll monitor function is executed the following message is displayed If Yes is selected the SFC diagram and the Zoom editor window are synchronized and the operation output transition condition programs that correspond to the active steps are monitored automatically If No is selected only the SFC diagram is monitored Note that the program cannot be edited on the Zoom editor window that is displayed when the auto scroll monitor function is activated MELSOFT Series Works I
217. file Section 5 8 Write to CSV File Write label settings to the CSV file Reflect system label information changed in another project on global labels Import system label information and Import System Label reflect it on global labels Section 5 2 Register Device Name of Register selected global label as System Label system label Disable System Label Disable the relation between selected Relation global label and system label Other shortcut keys 13 CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING i PROGRAMS Be ie i Confirm Update of System CONTROLLER CPU Label Database lt x T LLI oc c O lt c O E 2 The following table shows other shortcut keys for setting labels 7 Select All Select all rows om Display all lines of comment and remark Section Display only the first line of comment and E Ctr Po remark of the selected line gt SETTING OPTIONS APPENDIX INDEX Appendix 1 3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels App af GX Works2 APPENDIX Appendix 1 4 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for setting device memory Device Memory toolbar icons The following table shows the Device Memory toolbar icons and the cor
218. function blocks tee 6 24 6 4 Using Inline Structured Text 6 26 6 4 1 Feature of Inline structured 6 26 6 4 2 Inserting inline structured text 4 6 27 6 4 3 Editing inline structured text 6 28 6 4 4 Deleting nine structured text aucto cua EEE aan 6 29 6 4 5 Precautions on using Inline structured text 6 30 6 5 Moving Cursor to Start of Ladder Block 6 31 6 6 Drawing Lines 6 32 6 6 1 PAIN er 6 32 6 6 2 Entering vertical or horizontal lines pp 6 33 6 7 Deleting Contacts Coils and Application Instructions 6 35 6 7 1 Deleting contacts coils and application instructions in unit of instruction 6 35 6 7 2 Deleting contacts coils and application instructions by setting a range 6 36 6 7 3 Br iere rodeo Cer M D 6 37 6 8 Deleting Lines 6 38 6 8 1 BI SRM I UE 6 38 6 8 2 Deleting vertical or horizontal eene nne 6 39 6 9 Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns 6 41 6 9 1 nei 6 41 6 9 2 DENG TOWS ud 6 42 6 9 3 JA 15 ENG eo ga NE EE EE KS ER 6 43 6 9 4 Deleting Colums zers s 6 44 6 10 Batch
219. functions of JOG inching or positioning data for QD75 LD75 positioning module must be executed with the programmable controller set to STOP after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured Specially when executing the function on the network system ensure the safety thoroughly since the machinery whose operation cannot be checked by an operator may be activated The operation failure may cause the injury or machine damage A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT O 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICA
220. g results in ascending and descending order Ascending order Descending order The Undo operation can be performed only once immediately after the sort execution The initial step is always set to 0 for either ascending or descending order SFC devices at the sorting operation SFC devices used for operation outputs transition conditions such as BLm Sn BLm TRn are not sorted Change them using the device replacing function 7 8 Redisplaying SFC Diagrams 7 8 Redisplaying SFC Diagrams This section explains how to delete unused vertical divergence convergence lines in the converted SFC diagram If the unconverted SFC diagram is redisplayed the unconverted SFC diagram is discarded and the latest converted status is restored OVERVIEW 2 Operating procedure 22 Select Edit gt Arrange SFC lt Deleting row section gt DO 3 Q Edit gt 55 SFC 50 38 gt F PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Edit gt Arrange SFC r SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Q 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions This section explains how to create operation output and transition condition programs Create operation output and transition condition programs on the
221. gt Label Setting Editor Editor Setting v Automatic and increment when inserting row Copy data bypelcomment items Deleting rows Delete a row on the label setting screen Select Edit Delete Line 2 Class Label Class Label Mame 1 VAR GLOBAL data 1 GLOBAL data 2 VAR GLOBAL 2 GLOBAL CONSTANT 3 VAR GLOBAL CONSTANT 3 B 7 5 18 5 5 4 Editing rows 5 5 Common Operations for Setting Labels Displaying all lines or first line of comments and remarks For the Comment and Remark columns data can be entered in multiple lines The all lines first line display function switches the display between all lines and only the first line by double clicking or _ 2 GLOBAL Global data eit 5 Ed data 2 OVERVIEW Only the first line is displayed Global data Element Group Eleament Groupe Element3 Group3 Element4 Group4 E lementb Group5 Global data 2 VAR GLOBAL SCREEN Gd CONFIGURATION All lines are displayed Selecting all rows All rows can be selected by the following operation e Select Edit gt Select All 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE Function FB Label Setting FB SYOKIKA FB Class Label Name Data Type 1 Buffer W ard Signed 2 CONSTANT Additional Data INPUT Input Variable INPUT
222. gt Label Setting Editor gt Default Length of String Date Type and set the data length 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE Data Type Setting Default Length of String Data Type PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 5 5 3 Selecting data types 5 17 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5 5 4 Editing rows Edit rows on the label setting screen Adding rows Add row on the label setting screen New Declaration Before This function inserts row above the selected row Select Edit gt New Declaration Before amp Class Label Name Class Label 1 EH 0 EB 2 GLOBAL 2 WAR GLOBAL 3 GLOBAL CONSTANT GLOBAL vidas New Declaration After This function inserts a row below the selected row Operation Select Edit New Declaration After Class Label Name Class Label Hame 1 GLOBAL vlfdatat 1 VAR GLOBAL EN 2 GLOBAL 2 VAR GLOBAL 3 VAR GLOBAL CONSTANT v dsa3 1 3 GLOBAL data Point Adding rows When using the New Declaration After function the setting of added rows can be specified whether to leave cells blank or to enter label names or data types automatically Select Tool gt Options
223. h edit screen for line statements Tab Display the batch edit screen for P statements Display the batch edit screen for I statements Display the batch edit screen for notes Step Display the start step numbers of all ladder blocks in the program Display the step numbers of all coils and application instructions in the program Pointer Display all pointer numbers in the program Display all interrupt pointer numbers in the program Screen button Change type Changes the type between and Insert Row Inserts a row above the selected line statement Add Row Inserts row below the selected line statement Delete Row Deletes a line statement e Edit Moves the statement upward Find Executes search in the upward direction from the selected statement or note Bottom Edit Moves the statement downward Find Executes a search in the downward direction from the selected statement or note e Jump Moves the cursor to the selected statement or note on the editing screen Point Precautions when editing statements notes in FXCPU The statement note function is not available for FXCPU Thus the settings regarding PLC Peripheral type described in this section cannot be used For details of the PLC Peripheral type refer to Section 9 2 1 9 3 Batch Editing Statements and
224. hange in PLC Change in Peripheral FE gt CD g 2 Find Direction 300 Sed Down from Head ac c C5 Down from Cursor LoS 7 Specified Range 1 Operating procedure 1 Setthe items on the screen MONITORING Item Description Check this to select the target whose type is to be changed Multiple objects Object can be selected T Change in PLC Select this to change Peripheral to PLC ype Change in Peripheral Select this to change to Peripheral Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the Down from Head oe Find program regardless of the current cursor position Direction Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position Specified Range Select this to execute a search in the range set by the entered step numbers 2 Click the _ fmn button The cursor moves to the searched statement or note 3 Click the cha _ Change all button to change the type The type is changed and the search for the next statements or notes continues Ifthe Shange all button is clicked the types are batch replaced for all searched statements or notes CD 2 O D O O lt APPENDIX Point Switch statement note type function The statement note type at the cursor position can also be changed by pressing the Ctr keys Convert t
225. hapter 5 Define local labels 1 For FXCPU a project with labels does not support the SFC language 4 Editing and converting compiling programs for ladder programs Procedure Reference Edit ladder programs Chapter 6 Convert programs For projects without labels Check programs For projects without labels Chapter 10 Compile a program or compile all programs For projects with labels LL To the next page 3 1 Creating Programs From the previous page LL 5 Editing and converting compiling programs for SFC programs Procedure Reference OVERVIEW Edit SFC diagrams Chanter For FXCPU enter a ladder block to turn ON the initial step Edit operation output programs and convert them Edit transition condition programs and convert them Set properties of SFC programs and SFC blocks Chapter 7 Check programs For projects without labels Compile program or compile all programs For projects with labels Vy Chapter 7 Chapter 10 SCREEN 8 CONFIGURATION Chapter 10 0 lt Ep 22 6 Connecting personal computer to the programmable controller CPU pam Procedure Reference TE Connect a personal computer to the programmable controller CPU GX Works2 Version 1 Set the connection target Common LL f Writing data to the programmable controller CPU PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Procedure Reference Write parameters
226. he block title A x Block information For details of functions and operations of each item refer to the following manual 8 lt gt MELSEC Q L QnA Programming Manual SFC When the block information is changed in the project with labels the program becomes uncompiled status TO 3 o x GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 11 Displaying SFC Block List This section explains how to display the list of the SFC program block information including the SFC diagram being edited Open the screen of the SFC diagram in advance Screen display Select View gt Open SFC Blocklist lt QCPU mode LCPU gt I PRG MAIN Read Only Black Start Step Transition Block PAUSE BESTART Pause Mode Number of Active Steps 0 Bock FistProcess M0 Number of Active Steps 1 M4 BlockO Comment Fi M4 1 Block Mumber of Active Steps Block 1 Comment Block2 Third Process Number of Active Steps 3 Block 2 Comment In Process Do Block10 Comment nat use FXCPU gt jJ PRG MAIN Read Only Data Name Title Black Type Comment 0 Block First Process Block 1 lockt Second Process Block EEE 2 Black Third Process SFC Block 4 Display contents Item Description No Display Block No set on the Property screen of SFC block Data Name Display the block name Title Display Title set on the Property screen of SFC block Block Type
227. he editing screen EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS x100 2 100 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 6 2 Entering vertical or horizontal lines 6 33 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Point Initial values of Number of rows or columns The initial value of the Enter HLine screen can be set to 1 with option settings Check Set initial value to 1 for Enter HLine Delete HLine dialog under Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder Ladder Diagram Changing the cursor position on the editing screen while the Enter VLine screen or Enter HLine screen is displayed Use the cte keys to change the cursor position on the editing screen mececeeeem er 1 0 Enter VLine gp x ee Entering horizontal lines consecutively Use the Shirt keys to enter the horizontal lines consecutively from the cursor position x10 x20 H i Ee sc E x10 x20 0 END 6 34 6 6 2 Entering vertical or horizontal lines 6 7 Deleting Contacts Coils and Application Instructions 6 7 Deleting Contacts Coils and Application Instructions This section explains how to delete contacts coils and application instructions OVERVIEW 6 7 1 Deleting contacts coils and application instructions in unit 2 of instruction lt 29 Delete contact coil or
228. he ladder is edited such as insertion or deletion of columns in the middle step of a wrapped ladder the ladder may not be wrapped correctly which causes the conversion impossible If this happens make corrections so that the wrapping source symbol gt number and the wrapping destination symbol gt number match correctly Example A column is inserted in front of XOF Head step Column inserting position Middle step Last step J Wrapping source symbol gt 4 and wrapping destination symbol gt K4 are automatically created This causes matching failure between the wrapping source symbol gt K1 and the wrapping destination symbol gt 1 Head step Middle step Last step 6 14 Precautions Editing Ladders In this case a correction needs to be made to the ladder so that the wrapping destination symbol gt K1 corresponds the wrapping source symbol gt K1 Move row below row Head step 2 Z H Middle step 5 gt X zZ OO nO Last step 3 0 25 ll am Qo OO Yo oo Insert a new row to and create the wrapping source symbol gt with 5 and wrapping destination symbol gt with K3 PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt c lt LLI 42 REPLACE Er GX Works2 6 EDITING
229. he program when this function is performed as the program becomes unconverted status INDEX When statements notes not entered at the right position When statements notes are not entered at the right position even after the merge process is performed correct their positions using the statement note batch editing function Section 9 3 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES 9 5 Displaying Line Statements on Tree View This section explains a line statement displayed on a tree view of the Navigation window This function is not supported by FXCPU projects without labels 9 5 1 Line statements on tree view The line statements can be displayed on a tree view of the Navigation window Displaying the line statements on a tree view provides the easy to understand general program flow It also provides the quick search of ladder blocks since the program where the line statement is set can be displayed with the line statements on a tree view 9 22 Global Label Program Setting POU 5 Program folk MAIN sk Program ag Automatic operation program P Initial processing a Count the number of interrupt END Local Label iy FB Pool Structured Data Types FA Local Device Comment Device Memory Device Initial Value lt User Library lg Connection Destination Point T PRG Write MAIN 145 Step Title lnitial processing Setlreset
230. ice label on Ar the Enter Symbol screen Display options of instruction label on Space na the Enter Symbol screen mil Move the cursor on the editing screen while the Enter Symbol screen is displayed Section 6 2 NES E Ctrl Alt Jump to Next Ladder Block Jump cursor from the current position to the start of the next ladder block Section 6 5 Jump to Previous Ladder Jump cursor from the current position Block Start to the start of the previous ladder block reu on pn eu Ctrl turn mouse scroll Bigger Change the display size of text larger on wheel upward the editing screen Section 2 2 Ctrl turn mouse scroll Smaller Change the display size of text smaller 3 wheel downward on the editing screen Ctrl Shift Tile the ladder editor and the function Section Enter de block program editor horizontally 6 3 5 Open the SFC diagram corresponds to the program on the Zoom editor window 5 At Moves up down left right Move cursor toward up down left right of the SFC diagram Section Ctrl F1 Open Instruction Help Display the Instruction Help screen 622 Space Display the Find screen Instruction Help Display details of instructions Common em Shift Enter an assignment operator when Ctr sh
231. ide all ladder blocks Display All Ladder Block Display all hidden ladder blocks Device Display Display the device assigned by compilation Batch change the label display on the program editors to the PEN DEN device display Section 2 2 8 Cancel the device display on the program editors and display data the format at the time of data entry Display Compile Result Display the compilation result of the program on the inline Section 6 4 3 structured text box in a list form Zoom Change the display magnification of the ladder Section 2 2 2 Text Size E Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen Section 2 2 3 Reduce the text display size on the editing screen Tile FB Horizontally Tile the ladder editor and the function block program editor Section 6 3 5 horizontally Open Header Open the setting screen for the label set for a program being Section 6 2 6 edited Back to Zoom SFC Block Display the SFC diagram of the Zoom editor window Move SFC Cursor Move the cursor on the 5 diagram upward Move the cursor on the SFC diagram downward Section 2 3 1 Move the cursor on the 5 diagram to the left Right Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the right Open Instruction Help Display the Instruction Help screen Section 6 2 2 1 16 1 3 2 List of functions for editing in ladder language 1 3 List of Functions 1 3 3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams The following tables show
232. ift nm editing the inline structured text program Structured App 12 Appendix 1 7 Toolbar icons shortcut keys for program editors Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys B SFC toolbar icons and shortcut keys The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the SFC editor Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference J Z LU gt 9 LU STATEMENTS NOTES Section STEP New Step Insert Ez at the cursor position 73 1 B Block Start Step with FE Fe END check Insert Ez at the cursor position Section BS Block Start Ste 73 2 Shift Fe er END di Insert at the cursor position gt 2 gt Section lt lt F Fs JUMP Jump Insert g at the cursor position 738 2 Section m END END Step Insert at the cursor position 739 EUER Ly E gt E ct amp Section DUMMY Dummy Step Insert E2 at the cursor position 7 3 1 Section TR Transition Insert 7s at the cursor position 733 D Selection Divergence Insert a selection divergence Pos d a Insert a simultaneous divergence EZ Divergence 9 71 2 5 TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING WRITING READING DATA CONTROLLER CPU C Selection Insert selection convergence Convergence Section C Simultaneous 7 3 6 Insert simultaneous convergence Convergence S
233. ine statement list is displayed on a tree view 037 Section 9 5 1 4 1 Program Configurations of Simple Project lt Simple project with labels gt 0 0 0 0 i 7 Common Intelligent Function Module AOO 237 Intelligent gt gt Global Device Comment ttt 37 Common Global Label Shi ket Define labels shared among POUs 37 Section 5 2 2 2 fg Program Setting 2 3 Initial Program ge MAIN 28 MAIN Scan Program F MAIN fotttteeeenere Define the program execution type 037 Common g MAINZ Standby Program i Fixed Scan Pragram 8 Execution Type SCREEN CONFIGURATION Define POUS dr MAIN cttm RR Program ME ogam F reren Write a program in the desired programming language gt Chapter 6 Chapter 7 gj Local Label ee ee eee ee eee ee eee Define labels gt Section 5 3 fg MAINA i i o00 Block fJ nnt Blockt dh MAINZ sk Program a Control 21525651 ak Hukomatic operation program 00 ag Initial processing 45 Count the number of interrupt occurrences ag END Local Label 6 FB Pool SE gst se ME Program 2 0 04 02 44 Es Local Label Structured Data Types e BB Struct Local Device Comment PROGRAMMING aN PROCEDURE Line st
234. ing function E 2 0 Start Monitoring the I O System Settin Stop monitoring the I O System Setting Alt F4 Exit I O System Settings Exit the system setting E CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS Common lt x Q T LLI oc c O lt c O Z O gt SETTING OPTIONS APPENDIX INDEX Appendix 1 8 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I O system setting function App 15 GX Works2 APPENDIX Appendix 1 9 Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for editing intelligent function module data Toolbar icons for positioning monitor function The following table shows the toolbar icons for the positioning monitor function ec Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Monitor the operating status of positioning module Intelligent EN Start the positioning monitor me Alt 228 Stop the positioning monitor Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for editing predefined protocol support function data The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for editing predefined protocol support function data Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Ctrl Create new protoc
235. ing the program memory after the TC setting value Je change ag Online program change Ladder SFC Zoom ST FB 1 KE e TC setting value change When Write changed program to PLC is checked Write to PLC function When program memory device memory is the target memory Program memory batch transfer e Set as default connection Change PLC Type function Parameter check 1 For Universal model QCPU with a serial number of which the first five digits are 12012 or higher the program memory batch transfer operation can be suspended 22 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Saving project automatically after writing program with changed TC setting values to the programmable controller CPU Projects can be saved automatically after the Online program change by setting the option Check the Save project after changes TC setting values are written to PLC item under Tool gt Options gt Project gt Automatic Save Write changed program to PLC check box When the check box of Write changed program to PLC is disabled after compiling all programs select Online gt Write to PLC and write programs to the programmable controller CPU to validate the check box PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 16 Se
236. instruction 6 11 Cutting Copying and Pasting Ladders 6 11 2 Pasting cut or copied ladders by setting a range Paste cut or copied ladders by setting a range Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Setthe range by dragging the cursor from the start position of cut or copy 15 Ye CONFIGURATION SCREEN QJ 11 END 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE 11 END PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 2 Select Edit gt Cut 34 or Copy 23 When Cut 36 is selected the ladders in the set range are deleted 3 Move the cursor to the position where the cut or copied ladders are pasted SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS 4 Select Edit Paste The ladders are pasted Y70 Y71 Y72 O 0 0 2 og 20 EO 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 11 2 Pasting cut or copied ladders by setting a range 6 49 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 11 3 Pasting cut or copied ladder block Paste a cut or copied ladder block Operating procedure 1 Setthe range by dragging the cursor up or down from the start position of cut or Specify the range of a ladder block at the position where step numbers are displayed xn 1 2 x3 x5 70 x10 x11 x12 x13 x14 x15 8 m vn 2 Drag TO 23 2 Select Edit Cut 3 or Copy Ex
237. isplayed Enter a note as shown below Following the already entered device instruction enter for and 5 for Peripheral first and then enter a note Y oper Displaying notes on the editing screen Display hide of notes can be switched by selecting View gt Note Section 2 2 4 0 10 9 2 4 Entering notes 9 2 Editing Statements and Notes 9 2 5 Modifying and deleting notes Modify and delete notes STATEMENTS NOTES H O o lt Modifying notes Modify a note Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt Documentation gt Note The note entry mode is established CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS 2 Move the cursor to the note to be modified lt x D zZ Q T LLI ac 22 3 Press the key The Enter Note screen is displayed Enter Mote MONITORING In PLC Operation Preparation Confirmed In Peripheral 4 Change the type and or modify the note umm mpc 5 Click the button In Peripheral Exit 5 The modified note is displayed on the editing 2 screen 6 disable the note entry mode select Edit gt Documentation gt Note 2 again The note entry mode is disabled APPENDIX INDEX 9 2 5 Modifying and deleting notes 9 11 GX Works2 9 EDITING COM
238. ite ADD U MAIN ADD U 1 33 Step BAR EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS 52 English Simple Host Station NLP 2 EO ac Point 8 Displaying function block ladder programs function block ladder program can also be displayed by moving cursor to the function block and pressing a shift Ctr Enter keys or Shift Ctr keys double click 2 LLI TO N X 6 3 5 Displaying function block ladder programs 6 23 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 3 6 Precautions on using function blocks The following explains the precautions on using function blocks 1 One function block can be pasted to a single ladder block When connecting function blocks use coil to initially receive the function block outputs Paste the function block to be connected to another ladder block and connect it with the input DEC 1 1 PLUS2Z Ww H D200 PLUS 2 w P D200 FO Dant K333 2 The wrapping rows cannot be created in the input and output ladder parts Insert a coil to receive the output and use the contact of the coil as the target instruction condition DEG 1 1 PLUS 2 n bann 3 The parallel connections cannot be created in the input or output ladder part An error occurs when the ladders are converted 4 The data type of the input or output ladder part of the function block and the data type of the contact coil application instruction to be connecte
239. ith System Label System Label Attribute aa MAR GLOBAL 2 7 gum Complete _ Bit m 2 GLOBAL vjJEmargency Stop Switch Bit BP 3 GLOBAL CONSTANT v Temperature Contol LIE GLOBAL vfProduet Data 1 2 5 GLOBAL ai _ 1 0 6 GLOBAL Bi 790 171 Browse Lnk PROGRAM y CONFIGURATIONS 7 VAR GLOBAL grobal bit2 Bt Bowe grobalbit2 Link o b 4 System Label Operation To reflect the changes of the table above to the Change Register Release system label database D gt EG EM Impar Det Device Name Relation please save the project after compiling SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Operating procedure e Set the items on the screen Maximum number of Item Description EN Select label class from the list displayed by clicking zl Class lt Section 5 5 1 Ladder ST SFC 32 Label Name Enter a desired label name FB instance name 16 Specify a data type from the Data Type Selection screen displayed by Data Type clicking gt gt Section 5 5 3 128 It can also be entered directly Enter a constant value when VAR GLOBAL CONSTANT is selected vougant for Class and simple type is s
240. itor size Display data in octal 2 lt T c lt LLI 02 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project Reference Common Reference Common Reference Common Reference Common Common 1 11 Ney OVERVIEW SCREEN Gd CONFIGURATION 9 lt lt De 9 O 2 a PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS PROGRAMS EDITING SFC GO PROGRAMS REPLACE GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW Tool function for setting device memory Reference Read Device Memory from PLC R device memory data from the programmable controller Write Device Memory to PLC Write device memory data to the programmable controller CPU Common Read from Excel File Read data from an Excel file Write to Excel File Write data to an Excel file B List of functions for verification result The following tables show the functions for verification result Edit function for verification result Reference Write to CSV File Write verification result to a CSV file Common Find Replace function for verification result Reference Next Unmatch Move to the next mismatched data Common Previous Unmatch Move to the previous mismatched data View function for verification result Reference Return to the lt lt Verify Result List gt gt tab from the lt lt Detail Verify Result gt gt tab Close Detail Result Close
241. ix 1 9 Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function App 16 INDEX INDEX 1 to INDEX 5 MANUALS Related manuals separately issued according to the purpose of their functions in GX Works2 Related manuals The manuals related to this product are shown below Refer to the following tables when ordering required manuals A 12 1 Operation of GX Works2 Manual name GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Explains the system configuration of GX Works2 and the functions common to Simple project and Structured project such as parameter setting operation method for the online function Sold separately GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Structured Project Explains operation methods such as creating and monitoring programs in Structured project of GX Works2 Sold separately GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module Explains operation methods of intelligent function module such as parameter setting monitoring programs and predefined protocol support function GX Works2 Sold separately GX Works2 Beginner s Manual Simple Project Explains fundamental operation methods such as creating editing and monitoring programs in Simple project for users inexperienced with GX Works2 Sold separately GX Works2 Beginner s Manual Structured Project Explains fundamental operation methods such as creating editing and monit
242. ject Operating Manual Structured Project Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module About Display product information such as the version B List of functions for setting labels The following table shows the functions for setting and editing labels Edit function for label setting Reference Delete Delete the selected data Select All Select all items New Declaration Before Add row above the cursor position Section 5 5 4 New Declaration After Add a row below the cursor position Delete Row Delete row at the cursor position Read from CSV File Read label settings from the CSV file Section 5 8 Write to CSV File Write label settings to the CSV file System Label Confirm Update of System Label Reflect system label information changed in another project Database on global labels Import System Label Import system label information and reflect it on global labels Section 5 2 Register Device Name of System Label Register selected global label as system label Disable System Label Relation Disable the relation between a selected global label and a system label Execute Verification Synchronous with Resolve a mismatch when system label information contains System Label it 1 10 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 3 List of Functions B List of functions for editing device comments The following table shows functions for editing device comments Edit functi
243. ks 2 11 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Displaying hidden ladder blocks Display hidden ladder blocks Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor on the gray line of the hidden ladder block PRG MAIN XO Y4 MI 0 HEF rer H0 E MM iproP H0 Ho H0 lt Ladder block non displaved gt 2 Select View gt Display Ladder Block The hidden ladder block is displayed PRG MAIN XO Y4 MI 0 HEF rer H0 E M iproP H0 Ho DTOP H0 it X15 2 1 gt 118 XO x16 1391 HH DFRO AD x1 146 f Displaying hiding ladder blocks Multiple ladder blocks can be selected to display hide All ladder blocks are displayed hidden by selecting View gt Display All Ladder Block Non Display All Ladder Block Ladder blocks can also be displayed hidden by right clicking and selecting Display Ladder Block Non Display Ladder Block from the shortcut menu 2 12 2 2 9 Hiding ladder blocks 2 2 Ladder Editor 2 2 10 Displaying step ladder STL instruction in contact format For FXCPU projects without labels whether to display step ladder instructions in contact format can be selected by setting the option Screen display NG OVERVIEW
244. l Press the El keys Enter Symbol Enter Symbol ES 1 mov OK Exit Help E eu po Em Increment decrement the device label Press the Ar keys Enter Symbol 3 Enter Symbol Point Increment and decrement When incrementing a label that does not have a number 0 is suffixed to it For a device in hexadecimal format it is incremented decremented in the hexadecimal format For X or Y device of FXCPU it is incremented decremented in the octal format 6 8 6 2 1 Entering contacts coils and application instructions 6 2 Entering Instructions Registering undefined labels during program creation When the label that is entered on the Enter Symbol screen is not defined it can be registered to the label setting editor following the ladder symbol entry For registering a new label following the ladder symbol entry the Open Undefined Label Registration dialog at ladder entry item under Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder gt Ladder Diagram needs to be checked Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Enter the undefined label on the Enter Symbol screen Enter Symbol SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Click the _ button The Undefined Label Registration screen is displayed Undefined Label Registration 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE Mot defined as global label nar local label
245. l 7 Application Instruction Rising Pulse Shift FZ Falling Pulse 1 dtk Shift F8 un Rising Pulse Branch 1 7 Falling Pulse Branch E e Rising Pulse Close 3 nc h h N EN ect ct E gt Falling Pulse Close 2 em te EL EL EL en EE EE Er J T m za Rising Pulse Close Branch car 2 3 E F Tl 1 Falling Pulse Close Branch Alt F8 Operation Result Rising Pulse 3 JES Operation Result Falling Pulse 2 F5 JO Invert Operation Results E et FE Q I 1 Not supported by FXo FXos FXoN FX1 FXu and FX2cCPUs 2 Supported by Universal model QCPU LCPU only 3 Not supported by FXo FXos FXoN FX1 FXu FX2c FX1s FX1N FX1NC FX2N and FX2NCCPUs 6 6 6 2 1 Entering contacts coils and application instructions 6 2 Entering Instructions Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where ladder symbol is entered OVERVIEW 2 Select Edit gt Ladder Symbol gt Ladder symbol 2 The Enter Symbol screen is displayed 2 lt 4 Enter Symbol 2 3 Consecutive ladder 810 M OK Exit Help vz symbol entry button D Ladder symbol Instruction device entry field 3 Consecutive device selection field comment entry button The follo
246. l sequence 2 9 PEA 4 Var OUTPUT jun Pt 4 5 VAR OUTPUT ps Delete output label OUT 1 Es s Cam pm al 9 output label PLUS3 E Tr aA Execute compilation SZ lt Example of function block after changing label settings gt D11 PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS PLUS Wr 0200 0100 Point Checking duplicated coils the ladder programs When the same devices are used in the source ladder program and the target function block even if Check duplicated coil is selected under Program Editor Ladder SFC Device in the option setting the duplicated coils are not detected Check the duplicated coils in the source ladder program and the target function block by the Cross reference function For the projects with labels the duplicated coils can be checked by unchecking the item in Program Check under Tool gt Options gt Compile gt Basic Setting ep SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER zN PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 6 3 6 Precautions on using function blocks 6 25 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 4 Using Inline Structured Text This section explains the Inline structured text function 6 4 1 Feature of Inline structured text Inline structured text is function to edit monitor program by creating an inline structured text box that displays
247. layed gt Select whether to switch Ladder Edit Mode 1 3 Ladder Use the Switching Read Write Monitor and Monitor Write Ladder Edit Mode Will be the same operation as the ladder edit Section Read Write Monitor mode of GX Developer 6 1 2 Monitor Vrite Unable to set when security setting is Editor Ladder enabled ye a z Select whether to automatically display Section at symbol error Instruction Help when symbol errors occur 6 2 2 N occurrence Open Undefined Label Select whether to open Undefined Label i i Section Registration dialog at Registration dialog when labels used at 6 2 1 ladder entry ladder entry are undefined pr nel ya de io Select whether to set initial value to 1 when Enter HLine Delete x Enter HLine Delete HLine dialog is opened HLine dialogue Q Sr Section e at nie eonnec o Select whether to edit line by connection 6 6 2 points Instruction lt point Instruction Vertical Line when Enter Vertical Line when enter da HLine Delete HLine is executed or delete horizontal line Tool Hint Display Items Select items displayed on tool hint Tool Hint Display Format Select display lines on tool hint Select whether to use the automatic indent when beginning new line after entering ST control syntax such as IF FOR when fi displaying template of inline struc
248. le tab Edit Data Parameter Program Select All Cancel All Selections Module Name Data Name Title Target Detail Last Change Target Memory Detail 2010 08 05 16 08 09 2152 Bytes 2010 08 05 16 08 09 2152 Bytes File list 2010 08 05 16 08 09 2152 Bytes PLC Network Remote Password Switch Setting 2010 08 05 16 05 57 A a Detail 2010 08 05 16 05 57 E afe pes 3 a Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Memory Writing Size Free Volume Use Volume cap a city 6 456Bytes 226 856 18 904Bytes Refresh Related Functions Remote Set Clock PLC User Data Write Title Format PLC Clear PLC Memory Arrange PLC Operation Memory Memory lt Write to PLC screen for the project with labels gt For QCPU mode LCPU FXCPU FX3U FX3UC version 3 00 or later symbolic information is displayed on the file list Online Data Operation Connection Channel List Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Rar M C Read Write C verify Delete Setting target PLC Module Intelligent Function Module Execution Target Data No Yes module tab Title Edit Dat Parameter Program Select All Cancel All Selections E 9 Display Size Module Name Data Name Title Target D
249. ler CPU update the target memory before reading data from the programmable controller CPU 11 4 11 1 Writing Reading Data to from Programmable Controller CPU Symbolic information The symbolic information is data that store the program configuration such as structures and labels To restore these data included in the symbolic information when reading program from the programmable controller CPU write read the symbolic information to from the programmable controller CPU Data such as structures and labels included in the symbolic information cannot be restored if only sequence programs are read J Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES The following table shows the program data included in the symbolic information 2 7 0 Item Included data fy 5 Global label 255 POU OO W 1 Symbolic information Local label Function block Structure eee TEN COMPILING WRITING READING DATA oz LLI 474 Point Compile status when the symbolic information is read When the symbolic information and parameters are read simultaneously and the data in the symbolic information match with parameters and programs program files in the programmable controller CPU the read data are in compiled status When only the symbolic information is read the read data are in uncompiled status When the symbolic information
250. lished 2 Move the cursor to the pointer number or interrupt pointer number where a P CD 2 H DL O 2 statement or I statement is entered 42 x 3 Press the key 2 Enter Statement screen is displayed Enter Statement PO In PLC 4 Select the statement type In PLC or In C mPerphora m Peripheral PLC statement is not supported by FXCPU fi 9 Enter a P or I statement Enter Statement PO 2 f In PLC Initial Process Ic In Peripheral 9 2 2 Entering statements 9 5 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES 6 Click the button The entered P or statement is displayed on the editing screen P and I statements enclosed by brackets Initial process SM400 FEND f To disable the P statement I statement entry mode select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement 3 again The statement entry mode is disabled Point P or I statements can be entered on the Enter Symbol screen Move the cursor to the pointer number or interrupt pointer number where a P or I statement is entered and press the Enter key The Enter Symbol screen is displayed Enter a line statement as shown below Following the already entered pointer number or interrupt pointer SM40D number enter for and for Peripheral and then enter a P or statement Help Ext
251. list h by clicking the cell under Target Memory For details of the memory card application refer to the following manual gt QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 37 MELSEC L CPU module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Option 2 File list Target Memory Memory capacity gt Writing Size Display the total size of written data checked in Target Display the free space volume of the target memory Display the used space volume of the target memory 1 Not supported by FXCPU 2 Displayed only when writing data to the programmable controller PLC using a project with labels 3 For FXCPU program size and symbolic information data size are displayed when executing the Write to PLC function Symbolic information size is displayed on the screen for projects with labels of FX3u FX3uc version 3 00 or later only When a program program file device comment or device memory is selected the range can be set by clicking the Betal Betal button When reading data from the programmable controller CPU and the device memory is selected the detailed settings are required For details refer to the following manual 3 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Click the button When the Write to PLC function is executed the specified data are written to the target memory When the Read from PLC function is executed the specified data are read from the targe
252. llowing is an example for QCPU Q mode For Common and Intelligent indicated as the reference refer to the following manuals respectively Common GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Intelligent GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module Simple project without labels gt Er 888 gt Common Intelligent Function Module 1 teet 37 Intelligent Global Device Comment j 0000 000000e0 037 Common Program Setting 2 Initial Program g MAIN ak MAIN ifi Scan Program Define the program execution type 37 Common 1 g MAINZ i Standby Program IM Fixed Scan Program 2 No Execution Pr Ur MR MEME Define POUS PE Program dude dd Write a program in the desired programming language h hapter 7 t gt Chapter 6 Chapter 8j 001 Blocki ge MAINZ ak Program ai Control 21525651 444 44 mm m Line statement list 3 8 Automatic operation program ag Initial processing ag Count Ehe number of interrupt occurrgnces 48 END Local Device Comment fa Device Memory i Device Initial Value 1 1 For FXCPU this item is not displayed 2 For FXCPU no classification for program execution type Only Execution Program is displayed Program configuration Sean ee ewes 237 Common 3 When Tree Display is set for a line statement list the l
253. ly When the cursor is placed at the block start step If View gt Open Zoom Start Destination Block is selected when the cursor is placed at the block start step the SFC diagram of the start destination block is displayed Using function blocks in the Zoom editor window Only function blocks created in the ladder language can be used for operation outputs Function blocks cannot be used for transition conditions amp Cutting copying pasting data Data can be cut copied and pasted between the ladder program and the program in the Zoom editor window However data containing instructions statements and pointers that cannot be used in the Zoom editor window cannot be pasted The ladder containing TRAN can be pasted to transition conditions only PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC co 5 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 7 9 1 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP3 FXCPU 7 35 GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 9 2 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP L instruction format Create operation output and transition condition programs in MELSAP L instruction format For details of MELSAP L instruction format refer to the following manual gt MELSEC Q L Programming Manual MELSAP L Screen display Select Edit gt SFC Symbol Step Du
254. m editor window a cursor of the SFC editor window can be moved Select the direction to move a cursor by selecting View gt Move SFC Cursor gt Up Down Left Right 5 E MH ree When the cursor of the SFC editor window is moved the cursor of the Zoom editor window moves to the corresponding position NG OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION SFC editor window The following explains the screen for editing a SFC diagram e MELSAP3 FXCPU NE re eee ee ee ee rs 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE 2 LII See ee eee Initial SFC step comment Step lt gt i 2 E x E 5 Ww ao pu ao o en P 3 3 3 1 1 2 Before Transition comment Jurnp 2 SFC step number 4 1 B1 E 2 IR 3 S Reset destination step number cc Q M Qn Start destination block number lt 5 og O 4 84 Transition number Er 42 PE 7 z 5 oa aM FO Or 7 4 Jump destination step number pus a 2 I Row number x to N t 2 3 1 Editing screen 2 15 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION MELSAP L instruction format Terri eee xu m E 2 1 4 Column number 4 E o JoLaberi oLabel2 oM20 Com
255. m editors Operating procedure e Select View gt Cancel All Device Display The device display of all program editors is canceled and data are displayed in the format at the time of data entry 2 10 2 2 8 Switching display between label names and devices 2 2 Ladder Editor 2 2 9 Hiding ladder blocks Hide converted ladder blocks If statements are set to ladder blocks they are remained displayed while ladder blocks are hidden PRG MAIN Initial setting gt NG OVERVIEW lt Set preset value x0 Y4 M10 Ort 1 H HO KO Set match out pt 1101000 gt Set min value for ring counter gt lt Set max value for ring counter gt SCREEN Od CONFIGURATION lt Set initial set complete flag gt lt Start stop counter operation gt 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE Hiding ladder blocks Hide ladder blocks Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the ladder block to be hidden PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS PRG MAIN 118 SETTING LABELS 138 146 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 2 Select View gt Non Display Ladder Block The ladder block is hidden PRG MAIN EDITING SFC PROGRAMS lt Ladder block non displaved gt 139 146 2 lt c t LLI 0o REPLACE 2 2 9 Hiding ladder bloc
256. ment for Initial step qi SFC step comment 2 i 0 aM20 amp bLabell3 3 Start destination block number 1L UNE 6 MOV Datal Data 0 K120 Comment for step 1 Program 5 I 1 raLabel4 21 aLabell Comment for Transition 1 Comment for Transition Transition comment Reset destination step number E ET PM SFC step number 10 I 5fe Transition number 11 1121 7 4 aLabell aM 3 21312 ELabel5 hT4 K200 4st oLinel on 14 i 3 Data 10 5 L aSwitchl bSwitch Comment for Transition 3 15 16 5 Jump destination step number 17 4 Row number 2 16 2 3 1 Editing screen MELSAP L start conditions format Comment for Step 1 i 5 i 3 Labell Comment for Transition 3 i 7 gfe JLabel3 8 5 Labell Label2 amp Label3 Row number Display contents Item Row number Column number SFC step number Transition number Start destination block number Reset destination step number Jump destination step number SFC step comment Transition comment Program 1 Not supported by FXCPU Labell Comment for Transition 1 Label4 35C M10 Label4 4 M12 b M11 Transition number Program 54
257. mmy Transition Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program Symbol STEP 1 Instruction List Comment SET Program h H 0 10 Operating procedure 1 Setthe items on the screen Item Description Program Enter an operation output or transition condition program 2 Click the button Screen button Change cn Executes the Online program change on the changed program Help Displays the Instruction Help screen 7 2 Section 6 2 2 Point Online program change after compiling all programs The Online program change cannot be performed after compiling all programs Switch the programmable controller CPU to STOP and perform Online Write to PLC For precautions when compiling all programs refer to Section 10 3 3 7 36 7 9 2 Creating operation output transition condition programs MELSAP L instruction format 7 9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions Operation output programs in MELSAP L instruction format Operation output instructions Operation output instructions are described in the following formats 5 Both uppercase lowercase letters be used ee gt O Instruction Ladder example description example 2 rr 209 NO x 3 Timer om oTO K100 tt Counter LOREN oCO K200 K200 0 High speed timer hOOO hTO K100 H F Instructions OO stheriha
258. ms can be hidden The registered warnings are not displayed in the Output window Screen display Select Tool gt Options gt Compile gt Output Result 9 o E zi zz zo Ok LL Oz Z KEE Gar 2 10 Invalidate Warning D 2 o Disable Warning Cod 0 isable Warning Codes Add 7 2 220 oog oon Delete E 955 goe i 2 6 Operating procedure DEG zo ZO 2 register the warnings enter the warning code and click the button 28 The registered warnings are not displayed in the Output window Invalidate Warning Invalidate Warning Disable Warning Codes C2880 Disable Warning Codes 000C2880 gt Delete Delete MONITORING To cancel the registration select the warning code and click the button The unregistered warnings are displayed in the Output window Invalidate Warning Invalidate Warning Disable Warning Codes Add Disable Warning Codes Add 000C2880 000 2880 C2055050 C2055050 5 02508654 02508654 Delete CD 2 O D O O lt LLI Point Warning codes Warning codes and their content can be checked in the Output window when compiling programs lt Section 10 4 Maximum number of warnings to be invalidated A maximum number of warnings to be invalidated is 100 INDEX
259. n above Same as list format MOV K100 DO moy K100 Di na OOD Indicates device Indicates a value Delimit with to write multiple operation outputs in parallel within the same step 2 MELSAP L description example Ladder example Y10 25 0 10 sM100 MOV K100 DO EET k10G pn Instructions which cannot be used operation output programs TE The following the instructions which cannot be entered to operation output programs 3 MELSAP L 2 e m e MPS MRD MPP Contact instructions Comparison operation instructions such as lt gt Precautions when writing operation output programs Write instructions which do not require an execution condition such as DI El at the last of each operation output program Example oY 70 MOV DO D100 DI Up to 24 instructions can be written to a single operation output program EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC co 5 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 7 9 2 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP L instruction format 7 37 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS B Transition condition programs in MELSAP L instruction format Transition condition instructions Transition condition instructions are described in the following formats Both uppercase and lowercase letters can be u
260. n Comment n Sort SFC Step No 8 SFC All Block Batch Monitoring Monitor lt LLI IO ta LU LU N X GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 3 1 Entering SFC steps 1 054 Enter a SFC step Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where a SFC step is entered 2 Select Edit gt SFC Symbol gt Step Dummy Step The Enter SFC Symbol or the Enter SEC Symbol Enter Program screen is displayed in accordance with the display format setting lt MELSAP3 FXCPU gt SFC step number Enter SFC Symbol F3 Symbol STEP Step Attribuke Comment Cancel lt MELSAP L instruction format gt SFC step number Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program Symbol STEP Step Attribute E Instruction List ma e Comment Bo SEIN PEST Program MELSAP L start conditions format gt SFC step number Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program symbol STEP 1 V stepattrbute Comment Program Label Candidacy Display Target Data Local Label Block J J Conversion Cancel 7 10 7 3 1 Entering SFC steps 7 3 Creating 5 Diagrams 3 Set the items on the screen Item Description Select STEP or DUMMY Symbol Dummy steps are changed to the SFC step display automatically when the operation output program is created SFC step number Enter a SFC step number Select the SFC step attribute
261. n a module I O number is changed by changing the module mounting status For FXCPU the FROM P TO P DFROM P and DTO P instructions are the target instructions Screen display Select Find Replace Change Module No Change Module Start VO No Old Module 110 Ma Range HEX Find Mest Start End 40 xo Mew Module Start Address HEX Close r Find Direction Change Change All C Down From current step C Specify step range For FXCPU Old Module I O No Range HEX is indicated as Old Module I O No Range 0 7 and New Module Start Address HEX is indicated as New Module Start Address 0 7 Operating procedure 1 Setthe items on the screen Item Description Enter a module start MO number in the range to be changed start Click to select from the list of ten module I O numbers entered Old Module I O No Range previously HEX Enter a last module I O number in the range to be changed End Click El to select from the list of ten module I O numbers entered previously Enter a replaced module number that corresponds to the module I O number entered for the Start New Module Start Address HEX Click to select from the list of ten module I O numbers entered previously Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the Down from Head start of the program regardless of the current step position E Select this to execute a search in the down
262. nction in MELSAP3 display format Generic term for the SFC function in MELSAP L instruction format and MELSAP L start conditions MELSAP L format SFC Generic term for MELSAP3 MELSAP L and FX series SFC 5 The following are the terms used in this manual Term Execution program Actual device Common instruction Special instruction Simple project Description compiled program created in project with labels program that can be executed in programmable controller CPU An actual device assigned to label after compiling a project with labels or a device that is not described using a label Generic term for sequence instructions basic instructions application instructions data link instructions multiple CPU dedicated instructions and multiple CPU high speed transmission dedicated instructions Generic term for module dedicated instructions PID control instructions socket communication function instructions built in function instructions and data logging function instructions Generic term for projects created using the ladder SFC ST language Without labels Generic term for projects created without selecting Use Label when creating new projects With labels Generic term for projects created with selecting Use Label when creating new projects Structured project Project without labels Project with labels Project with security List format Generic term for projects created using the l
263. ng Setting Values This section explains how to display setting values of timer counter used in the ladder SFC Zoom program and changing them in batch Screen display Select Edit gt Change TC Setting Change IC Setting Value Program Mame MAIN E Device Label Setting Value before Change Setting Value after Change i 1 ijs fs kk 2 List of timer counter ae RO se 2 24 1 For duplicated coils first setting values are subjected to change 2 IF setting values in FB program are changed values in FB instance will be also changed write changed program to PLC Execute Close Operating procedure 1 Setthe items on the screen Item Description Program Name Select a program name whose setting values to be changed by clicking List of timer counter Display a list of timer counter of the program selected for Program Name Display step numbers of timer counter used in the program Device Label Display devices labels of timer counter Setting Value before Display the setting values of timer counter currently set Change a ial after Enter the setting values of timer counter to be changed Write changed program to PLC 2 Check this to write the changes to the programmable controller CPU 1 This item cannot be selected after compiling all programs For details refer to the Point in this section For precautions when compiling all programs refer to Section 10 3 3 2 For FXCPU this i
264. nged or the FB is deleted 5 When I O labels of the source FB are changed and compiled When the devices or labels replaced with the replacement function by specifying the whole project 2 When setting change is executed Use the security function to prevent editing the programs 5 5 37 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 2 Displaying in read mode monitor mode 3 When the master control instructions are used in the ladder the nesting numbers are displayed as shown below For details of nesting number of master control refer to Section 2 2 1 MC N1 PRG Monitor Stopping MAIN Read Only 12 Step DER Z itj gt Y INC Data A D tO SendDATA_1 d B BIN DATA OUT DATA B OutDataA b X c gt na A nesting number is displayed PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Assigning shortcut keys When the Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode Read Write Monitor Monitor VWrite item is checked under Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt Ladder gt Ladder Diagram the functions assigned to the shortcut keys are changed as shown below table If the shortcut keys assigned to other functions the settings in the table are given priority and the assigned shortcut keys are ignored Use the key customize function to set change the shortcut keys 2 gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common SETTING L
265. ns using ladder programs Machine operation flow chart Process start up operation SFC diagram Ladder diagram of operation outputs and transition conditions for each step Activation switch Work detection 0 X1 Conveyor activation x CI Initial step _____ x Hy Pallet detection Transition EH H condition 0 1 operation unit Y21 Clamp confirmation Transition EH Tran I condition 1 Step1 Pallet clamp 1 operation unit Pallet positioning Clamping operation Operation sequence Drilling process 1 operation unit Drill rotation T T T T T Z Z Z 22 22 I PLS MO 0 Drill descent I SET Y23 X4 Drill descent edge position RST Y23 K20 TO Drill ascent TO I SET Y24 M Step2 Drill ascent edge position X5 Transition Ha Tran condition 2 Pallet unclamp Y25 Y25 Step3 lt PLS M H Unclamping operation Work transportation 1 operation unit M1 c Y24 X8 confirmation COREY amor X7 Work transportation confirmation Transition ee Tran H condition 3 Process completion r 1 operation unit End step SFC program 7 2 Difference between MELSAP3 MELSAP L Create programs on the SFC editor window and the Zoom editor window when displaying SFC programs in MELSAP3 Edit SFC diagrams on the SFC editor window and
266. nt I Statement Note be inserted Line Statement 2 Select the statement type In PLC or In P e ri p h e ra None In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note Edit InPeripheral Change Type i Insert Row 8 3 i C k th e Insert Row r Add Row b utto n M zl BERN T Display in Navigation Window Delete Row Find metRow Inserts a blank row above the cursor position Add Row Inserts blank row below the cursor position 4 Select the inserted row and enter a statement r e L 15 Statement i Statement3 9 3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes Deleting rows of line statements Delete a row of line statements Operating procedure STATEMENTS NOTES o 2 m o Z 1 Select the line statement to be deleted Statement Note Batch Edit Line Statement Statement I Statement Note Line Statement O Statementi 15 Statemen 1 cde Li Cres 45 Statement4 62 StatementS 70 None In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note Edit Type Move InPLC C InPeripheral Change Type Insert Row Li To z Fi r Add Row Display C Ladder Bottom Display in Navigation Window 7 Delete Row Find vi Top Bottom Jump ox Cancel CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING
267. o create SFC diagrams For FXCPU a ladder block to activate the initial step of SFC program needs to be created separately from the SFC diagram 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common SFC symbols are entered by using the Enter SFC Symbol screen OVERVIEW SFC symbols also can be entered by using the toolbar and shortcut keys The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys 2 rz Block Start Step with END Check IFe 3 Block Start Step without END Check Shift F6 Fs F END Step F Fz OO EE Dummy Step SFS Shift F5 Selection Divergence m f sa Simultaneous Divergence F7 5 z OL Selection Convergence FS gt 5 E oO Simultaneous Convergence 5 Vertical Line sta Shift F9 7 No Attribute Ctr 1 3 Stored Coil Ctrl ig 2 SFC Step Attribute Stored Operation without Transition Check Ctrl Stored Operation with Transition Check Ctrl zu 15 lt Vertical Line Segment FS Alt F5 z Z Selection Divergence Alt EZ ES 2 ra t Edit Line Simultaneous Divergence 7 Selection Convergence Alt Fo Simultaneous Convergence 1 2 o lt Delete Line E Ctrl Documentation SFC Step Transitio
268. of GX Developer or GX IEC Developer is read the read data are in uncompiled status Compile the program again after executing the Read from PLC function Precautions for reading symbolic information For the precautions for reading label programs symbolic information of the existing application using GX Works2 or reading label programs symbolic information of GX Works2 using the existing application refer to the following manual 37 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common For FXCPU e Symbolic information can be read from write to a programmable controller CPU in a project of FX3u F X3uc version 3 00 or later only e When a memory cassette to which the symbolic information has been written is used on an FXCPU other than FX3U FX3UC version 3 00 or later the memory cassette can be used however the symbolic information cannot be read from the memory cassette When the symbolic information is written to a memory cassette on an FXCPU other than FX3u FX3uc version 3 00 or later the symbolic information may be corrupted Saving project automatically after writing data to programmable controller CPU A project can be saved automatically after writing data to the programmable controller CPU by setting the option Check the Save project after writing to PLC item under Tool gt Options gt Project gt Automatic Save MONITORING CD 2 O D O O lt LLI INDEX APPENDIX gt 11 5
269. ogrammable controller CPUs Corresponding module models are also listed if needed Generic term and abbreviation Description Generic product name for SWnDNC GXW2 E n version Generic product name for SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA SWnD5C GPPW EV and GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW EVA n version GX Works2 Product name for the integrated development environment included in SWnDNC IQWK iQ Platform MELSOFT Navigator compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works n version iQ Works Abbreviation for iQ platform supporting engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works Personal computer Generic term for personal computers on which Windows operates Basic model QCPU Generic term for Q00J 00 and Q01 n model Generic term for Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H and Q25H Generic term for Q00UJ 0000 0010 Q02U QO3UD QO3UDE Q04UDH Q04UDEH Q06UDH Universal model QCPU QO6UDEH Q10UDH Q10UDEH Q13UDH Q13UDEH Q20UDH Q20UDEH Q26UDH Q26UDEH Q50UDEH and Q100UDEH Built in Ethernet port Generic term for QO3UDE QO4UDEH QO6UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEH QCPU Q50UDEH and Q100UDEH QCPU Q mode Generic term for Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU and Universal model QCPU LCPU Generic term for 102 102 L26 BT and L26 PBT Generic term for FXos FXoN FX1 FXu FX2c FX1S FX1N FX1NC FX2N FX2Nc FX3G FX3u FXCPU and FX3uc FXGP WIN Abbreviation for SWOPC FXGP WIN E MELSAP3 Abbreviation for the SFC fu
270. ol setting E E 3 el EE fem emendam _ EI EE NEL LLL L NF App 16 Appendix 1 9 Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module SALON SLNAWALVLS SLN3INAWOO ONILIGA gt MELSOFT q TioyJNOO ONISHO LINOIN s SNOILdO ONILLAS lt XIQN3daV mum X3QNI INDEX 1 GX Works2 INDEX A Action Transition 7 31 AES 12 8 Active Step Monitor pp 12 14 Application Instruction 6 6 5 16 array element 4 5 16 5 24 Auto scroll monitoring 12 9 B Batch deleting NOPS pp 6 46 Batch editing Statements and Notes 9 13 Batch inserting NOPS 2 2002 6 45 pengon hold 12 8 block information MERERETUR 7 41 Block Information Find Device 8 11 block start step 7 12 7 35 12 9 DIOCK TINE 7 41 buffer memory 13 4 Change Instance Function Block 12 3 Change SFC Step NO 8 9 Changing display size of editing screen 2 5 Changing T C Setting Values 7 50 Changing the type 9 15 Changing the Type PLC
271. olumns 6 43 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 9 4 Deleting columns Delete columns Columns are deleted within the ladder block Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where the column is deleted 2 To delete multiple columns drag the cursor to set the range corresponding to the number of columns to be deleted The columns in the set range are deleted To delete a single column it is not necessary to set the range The column at the cursor position is deleted 3 Select Edit Delete Column The columns are deleted The screen image below shows the deletion of three columns 0 v70 6 44 6 9 4 Deleting columns 6 10 Batch Inserting Deleting Instructions 6 10 Batch Inserting and Deleting NOP Instructions This section explains how to batch insert and delete NOP instructions OVERVIEW 6 10 1 Batch inserting NOP instructions 2 2 Step numbers of the program be adjusted by batch inserting instructions Uu OO Operating procedure De 3 1 Move the cursor to the position where NOP instructions are inserted NOP instructions are inserted in front of the cursor position 9 x10 gt 0 OO 4 END 2 Select Edit gt NOP Batch Insert The NOP Batch Insert screen is displayed Batch Insert Number of Insert 50 Maximum Number of 1023930 Insert PROGRAM Q1 CONF
272. omment M13 Device Label Comment M14 Device Comment m 5 OO NO M24 ck2 Comment 3 O ag O gt Point 22 d LLI Displaying comments the SFC block list 58 Comments also can be displayed on the SFC block list by the following operation aa Select Tool gt Options gt Program Editor gt SFC Comment Comment Display Items Black List Step Transition PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 7 11 2 Displaying devices on SFC block list mmm Display devices assigned to labels on the SFC block list This function is available after the compilation of the SFC program Operating procedure Select View gt Address Display SETTING LABELS Zj PRG MAIN2 Read Only Data Title Block Start TEES Transition Block PAUSE RES TART ze Mode pp ee of Active Steps wo Transition Bit Comment 0 Block Process 0 BlockO Comment AU Pd Block Comment EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 5 M24 ck 2 Comment 3 Block 0 De Do Bok 0 Comment not use b 22216 uo Point ne When SFC program becomes uncompiled status S When the SFC program becomes uncompiled status the device display is disabled Displayed comments 8 When SFC Block List Comment is selected displayed comments are changed from label comments to device comments a lt TO N X 7 11 1 Displaying commen
273. on divergences 7 15 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 3 5 Entering simultaneous divergences Enter a simultaneous divergence Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where a simultaneous divergence is entered 2 Select Edit gt SFC Symbol gt Simultaneous Divergence The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen is displayed in accordance with the display format setting lt MELSAP3 FXCPU gt Number of divergences Eg a ale Enter SFC Symbol Cancel 3 Set the items on the screen Item Description Symbol Select D Number of divergences Enter a number of columns of divergence line Step Attribute This setting is not required Block This setting is not required Comment This setting is not required 4 Clickthe button The entered simultaneous divergence symbol is displayed lt Overwrite mode gt Enter a simultaneous divergence 30 Enter simultaneous divergence 7 16 7 3 5 Entering simultaneous divergences 7 3 Creating 5 Diagrams 7 3 6 Entering selection convergences Enter selection convergence Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Move the cursor to the position where selection convergence 15 entered 2 2 Select Edit gt SFC Symbol gt Selection Convergence 8 O The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen is displa
274. on for editing device comments Delete Delete the selected data Select All Import from Sample Comment Special Relay Special Register Intelligent Function Module Select all data being displayed Utilize sample comments of SM SD Utilize sample comments of intelligent function module device Clear All Delete all device comment data Read from CSV File Write to CSV File Read device comments from the CSV file Write device comments to the CSV file Hide the bit specified word device comment of the selected Hide Bit Specification Information row Display the bit specified word device comment of the Show Bit Specification Information selected row Cut The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information Cut data including hidden bit specified comment Copy The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information data including hidden bit specified comment Paste The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information Paste data including hidden bit specified comment List of functions for setting device memory The following tables show the functions for setting device memory Edit function for setting device memory Find Replace function for setting device memory Find Device Cell Search for a device EDITING LADDER View function for setting device memory Display Mode Binary Display data in binary Octal Decimal Display data in decimal Register Setup Change the ed
275. onitoring active steps 12 14 12 5 Monitoring SFC Programs 12 5 5 Monitoring SFC block list mmm Monitor a SFC block list Operating procedure 1 Select View gt Open SFC Blocklist The SFC block list is displayed 2 Select Online gt Monitor gt Start Monitoring 23 The columns of the active block are displayed in blue When the block information is set the ON OFF status of the block information device label can be checked on the SFC block list When the block information is not set the program is not monitored By double clicking the block column during monitoring the SFC diagram of the specified block is displayed SI PRG MAIN1 Read Only Data Name Ec Block Start Step Transition Block PAUSE RESTART Pause Mode Number of Active Steps Continuou E d 5 Bloek5 414 7 Block 4 gt 12 5 5 Monitoring SFC block list 12 15 J Z LLI O lt LLI STATEMENTS NOTES CONVERTING MIN TOFROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING PROGRAMS WRITING READING DATA N CONTROLLER CPU MONITORING CD 2 O D O O lt APPENDIX INDEX GX Works2 12 MONITORING MEMO 12 16 12 5 5 Monitoring SFC block list aN MELSOFT J Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES
276. oring programs in Structured project for users inexperienced with GX Works2 Sold separately 2 Structured Programming Manual name MELSEC Q L F Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals Explains the programming methods types of programming languages and other information required to create structured programs Sold separately MELSEC Q L Structured Programming Manual Common Instructions Explains the specifications and functions of common instructions such as sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions that can be used in structured programs Sold separately MELSEC Q L Structured Programming Manual Application Functions Explains the specifications and functions of application functions that can be used in structured programs Sold separately MELSEC Q L Structured Programming Manual Special Instructions Explains the specifications and functions of special instructions such as module dedicated instruction PID control instruction and built in I O function dedicated instruction that can be used in structured programs Sold separately FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common Explains the devices and parameters provided in GX Works2 for structured programming Sold separately FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Explains the sequence instructions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming Sold separately FXCPU Structured Programming
277. osition Section 6 6 1 Delete Line Delete a line at the cursor position Section 6 8 1 Change TC Setting Batch change timer counter setting values used in the Section 6 15 program Ladder Edit Mode Read Mode Switch the mode of the open window to Read Mode Section 6 1 2 Write Mode Switch the mode of the open window to Write Mode Ladder Symbol Open Contact Insert Fs at the cursor position Close Contact Insert T at the cursor position Open Branch Insert r at the cursor position Section 6 2 Close Branch Insert at the cursor position nsert f atthe cursor position Application Instruction Insert 2 at the cursor position Vertical Line Insert at the cursor position Section 6 6 2 Horizontal Line Insert at the cursor position Delete Vertical Line Insert at the cursor position Section 6 8 2 Delete Horizontal Line Insert 2 at the cursor position Pulse Contact Symbol 15714 1 3 2 List of functions for editing in ladder language 1 3 List of Functions Edit function for editing in ladder language Reference Inline Structured Text Insert Inline Structured Text Box Insert an inline structured text box Section 6 4 2 Insert a template corresponds to the instruction function or amp Display Template control syntax 2 Set argument of the template in the selected status from MS Template the left by selecting the menu each time
278. perating procedure 1 Select Compile Build P gt The ladder block is converted gt OO c c Aa 2 Enter the ladder symbol of the input lt Bit type gt ladder part Enter the ladder symbols in the same manner as creating ladders Big i ext Heb Create the ladder meeting the data type of input variable PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 3 Enter the output ladder part in the same manner as entering the input ladder part x lt If the data type of input variable is not a bit lt Other than bit type gt 2 type enter the device directly on the Enter Enter Symbol p zl cl D100 Exit Help Symbol screen Point Number of contacts that can be created at input ladder part and output ladder part By setting Display Connection of Ladder Diagram Section 2 2 7 the number of contacts occupied at input ladder part or output ladder part of function block is determined Instructions that exceed the number of occupied contacts cannot be entered When instructions cannot be placed according to the change in the number of displayed contacts the ladder block is not displayed properly EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS The following table shows the number of contacts at input ladder part and output ladder part T 2 CD Numberof displayed Number of contacts at input Number of contacts at 2 5 contacts ladder part output ladder part
279. precautions on compiling all programs refer to Section 10 3 3 SETTING LABELS Assigning device with Device Label Automatic Assign Setting Assign the devices to labels with the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting during compilation For details refer to Section 10 3 The assigned devices can be checked with the cross reference function GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Devices within the range set on the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting screen cannot be used in EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS a program Precautions when the multiple types of devices are assigned automatically QCPU mode LCPU 52 Refer to Precautions on compilation gt gt Section 10 3 3 25 Device types and Setting ranges The types of automatically assigned devices differ by the type of CPU 8 The setting ranges depend on the number of device points set in PLC parameter For details of PLC parameter refer to the following manual 37 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 2 LLI E 5 7 1 Precautions on automatically assigned devices 5227 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Precautions when displaying the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting screen When displaying the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting screen an error message may be displayed In this case terminate GX Works2 copy vsflex8n ocx stored in the folder of GX Works2 installation destination to C WINDOWS system32 for Window
280. procedure 1 Select Edit gt Read from CSV File The Read from CSV File screen is displayed Read from CSV File Look in GX Works2 amp er ifloball csv My Recent Documents My Network File name Places Files of type Csvitab delimited csv v Cancel 2 Select the file name to be read and click the 2 button The following message is displayed MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Reading of the specified file will start Do you want to continue Caution The current header setting will be deleted If many windows are open it may take more time to read Once reading is executed it cannot be undone 3 Clickthe button The label setting data is read to the project 5 8 Writing Reading Data to from CSV Files CSV file format The title name of label setting editor links with the title name of the CSV file Data of column which coincides in the title name of label setting editor in the CSV file is read to label setting editor Data of column which does not coincide in the title name of label setting editor cannot be read to the CSV file Columns order of the CSV file can be read even if it does not coincide in the columns order of label setting editor OVERVIEW 2 rr Y lt Label setting editor gt z Title name gt Class Label Name Data Type Constant Device Comment Remark LL 1
281. ps Point Ladder edit mode when option is set When Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode Read Write Monitor Monitor Write has been checked on the option settings the ladders cannot be edited since the Ladder edit mode becomes monitor mode when Start Monitoring is executed Switch to monitor write mode to edit the ladders Section 6 1 2 Changing current values During monitoring bit devices can be forced ON OFF and the current values of devices buffer memories and labels can be changed For forcing bit devices ON OFF and changing current values refer to the following manual 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common ON OFF status display x During monitoring the ON OFF status of bit device is displayed as on 4 M E shown on the right x 1 Only comparison instructions that are equivalent to contacts and OFF r gt SET RST PLS PLF SFT SFTP FF DELTA DELTAP instructions that are equivalent to coils are supported Monitoring buffer memory and link memory To monitor the ON OFF status of the buffer memory and link memory example UOYGO 1 select Tool Options Monitor gt Ladder Operational Setting and check Monitor buffer memory and link memory Monitoring FX series The GX Works2 display format be switched to the FXGP DOSJ FXGP WIN display format in FX series For details of switching the display format refer to Se
282. pt occurrences MONITORING Navigation X m PRG Write MAIN 113 Step E JER i Title 4utomatic operation program Z x1 BR Parameter b E Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment 21 8 Global Label O Program Setting Title Control Z 4 POU 24 Pro ram uj END Local Label fh FB Pool S Set reset Y75 Mir x m 5 an ee Title Count the number of interrupt occurrences lt Poi oint Copying to other programs When copying the ladder blocks within the range from a line statement on a tree view to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view to other programs drag and drop the line statement on a tree view of other programs The copied ladder blocks are pasted in front of the END instruction 9 5 4 Moving ladder blocks on tree view 9 25 Er GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES 9 5 5 Deleting ladder blocks on tree view Delete the ladder blocks on a tree view of the Navigation window from a line statement on a tree view to the programs before the next tree displayed line statement Operating procedure 1 Select a line statement on a tree view the Navigation window 2 Select Project gt Object gt Delete The ladder blocks from the selected line statement on a tree view to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view are deleted Navigation T PRGIWrite MAIN 113 Step
283. r Data Type PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Constant 128 This item cannot be set for local labels When the data type is Structure click the Detail Setting cell and set devices on the Structure Device Setting screen lt Section 5 6 3 Device SETTING LABELS Enter a comment Comment 1 2 Comments be displayed on the program editor by switching 1024 display hide of comments lt gt Section 2 2 4 1 A new line can be inserted in a cell by pressing the ctr Enter keys 2 The compilation is not needed after editing EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Point 9 Class setting When an item other than the class such as a label name or data type is set in a blank column VAR is automatically set for Class Change it if necessary Characters that can be used for label names Any of the following label names causes an error at compilation A label name that includes a space A label name that begins with a numeral A label name which is same as the one used for devices For characters that cannot be used for label names refer to the following manual gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Assigning devices automatically Devices are automatically assigned to labels when a program is compiled The device assignment range can be chang
284. rcibly transited lt lt Comment gt gt Enter comments of the SFC program Explanation When the cursor is placed on a setting item an explanation of the item is displayed 1 Not supported by Basic model QCPU Universal model QCPU and LCPU 2 Not supported by Basic model QCPU 0000 Q00UJ 0010 Q02U and LCPU 7 46 7 12 2 Setting the property of SFC programs 7 12 Setting Parameters for SFC Programs Point Applicable range for the set data The data set in the property of SFC program are commonly applied to all blocks in SFC programs Specific data cannot be set for each block Control SFC type program SFC diagram can be created for the block 0 only in the control SFC type program If a block start step is entered to the block 0 an error occurs and the programmable controller CPU stops when the program is executed OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC 5 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 7 12 2 Setting the property of SFC programs 7 47 GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 13 Precautions on Creating Programs MELSAP L mmm The following explains the precautions on creating SFC programs in MELSAP L 1 For Simple project either MELSAP3 or MELSAP L format can be
285. rection from the selected position Jump Cancel 3 The cursor moves to the searched statement or note Ste Line Statement 3 Statement1 15 Statement2 1 Statement3 4 s tedements 9 Searched statement Le 7 Jumping to specified statement and note Jump to a specified statement or note Operating procedure 1 Select statement or note for the jump Line Statement P Statement I Statement Note target 2 9 Statements Select ee 7 In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note Top Bottom Click the button Insert Row Add Row Delete Row Type InPLC C InPeripheral Change Type Display Display in Navigation Window The cursor jumps to the selected statement or note on the editing screen PRG Write MAIN 120 Step Statements 9 4 Changing the Type PLC Peripheral of Statement Note 9 4 Changing the Type PLC Peripheral of Statement Note rm cru This section explains how to change the statement note type of the converted program to PLC or Peripheral STATEMENTS NOTES H O o lt Screen display Select Find Replace gt Switch Statement Note Type z 2002 Switch Statement Note Type 2 gt Kg Object gt 20 Find Next 55 v Statement Note Change Type Change All 1 1 n Rd rad C
286. responding shortcut keys Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Display Mode Binary Change display format to binary TI Display Mode Octal Change display format to octal 10 UU Display Mode Decimal Change display format to decimal Display Mode 1 23 o 7 Display Mode Float Change display format to real numbers AEC m Display Mode String Change display format to string display format to string Display Mode String ASL ASCII only Change display format to ASCII Regste bit 000 bit Display data units of words data in units of words 16 bit 22 I aee Register 32 bit mul data in units of double words 64 Register 64 bit Display data in units of 64 bits Dex Input Device Enter a device 29 Set the same value to continuous FILL devices e Read Device Memory from Read data in device memory from a PLC programmable controller CPU Write Device Memory to Write data in device memory to a 18 programmable controller CPU ca 6 Read from Excel File Read data from an Excel file 3 Write to Excel File Write data to an Excel file Common Other shortcut key The following table shows other shortcut key for setting device memory psg Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Insert Insert a row at the cursor position Common App 8 Appendix 1 4 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and
287. roced ure Title bar f PRG Write MAIN 52 Step 5 Follow the gt and select AveData D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12J 12 2 menu to open the screen Step structure Screen display may depend on number text box the CPU In that case typical example is 55 described der END line 52 L5 Chapter heading 4 Left power rail Right base line m Index on the right of the page number clarifies the chapter of z currently open page i 7 Name Description 65 Title bar Display a data type data name and or other information of the open data Display contents Step number Display a start step number of the ladder block x inline structured textbox An area for editing ST programs on the ladder editor in a project with labels i T Describes the display contents Se os Cursor Data at the cursor position are edited oO in the screen Lei power ral ow Right base Ine Base lines of ladder programs pee END I Indicate the end of a ladder program Programs cannot created beyond the END line O ww zm og o EO or wo Section title SEARCH AND REPLACE Clarifies the section of currently 2 2 1 Editing screen 2 3 open page Screen display Select Tool gt Options Options Unset Project Language Setting Project n Automatic Save Change History Program Editor Device Comment Editor Label Setting Editor Parameter Monitor PLC Re
288. rows 6 9 2 Deleting rows Delete rows Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where the row is deleted 2 To delete multiple rows drag the cursor and set the range corresponding to the number of rows to be deleted The rows in the set range are deleted To delete a single row it is not necessary to set the range The row at the cursor position is deleted 6 42 6 9 2 Deleting rows 6 9 Inserting Deleting Rows Columns 3 Select Edit Delete Row The rows are deleted xO M2 0 Y70 z z SET Y73 2 2 6 9 3 Inserting columns 84 29 LL LL Insert columns Columns are inserted through the whole rows of ladder block Operating procedure 3 1 Move the cursor to the position where column is inserted A column is inserted in front of the cursor position 2 0 OO OO ru na PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 2 Toinsert multiple columns drag the cursor and set the range corresponding to the number of columns to be inserted The columns in the set range are inserted On the screen image below the range for inserting three columns is set SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3 Select Edit gt Insert Column The columns are inserted The screen image below shows the insertion of three columns EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE 6 9 3 Inserting c
289. rt step Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where a block start step is entered 2 Select Edit gt SFC Symbol Block Start Step with END Check Block Start Step without END Check The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen is displayed in accordance with the display format setting lt MELSAP3 FXCPU gt SFC step number Enter SFC Symbol F3 Black 0 Comment Cancel 3 Set the items on the screen Item Description Symbol Select BLOCK or BLOCK S SFC step number Enter a SFC step number Step Attribute This setting is not required Block Enter a start destination block number Comment Enter SFC step comments Up to 32 characters can be entered 4 Clickthe button The entered block start step symbol is displayed lt Overwrite mode gt 70 Enter block start step 1 gt Insert mode Enter block start step 3 A vertical line is inserted automatically to the other divergence T 12 7 3 2 Entering block start steps 7 3 3 Entering series transitions Enter a series transition Operating procedure 7 3 Creating SFC Diagrams 1 Move the cursor to the position where series transition is entered 2 Select Edit gt SFC Symbol gt Transition The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen is displayed in accordance with the display format setting lt MELSAP3 FXCPU
290. s XP and restart GX Works2 5 28 5 7 1 Precautions on automatically assigned devices 5 8 Writing Reading Data to from CSV Files 5 8 Writing Reading Data to from CSV Files This section explains how to write the label setting data to the CSV file and how to read the label setting data from the CSV file OVERVIEW Z T B Writing label setting data 20 Write label setting data to CSV files m a OO Operating procedure E 1 Select Edit Write to CSV File The following message is displayed 9 MELSOFT Series GX Works 2 S lt Q Currently displaved label information will be written 5 O A Do vou want to continue 2 2 aa Caution Structure device setting information will not be written 2 Clickthe button The Write to CSV File screen is displayed PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS Write to CSV File Save B Gx works d 3 Globali DEM Recent Documents 2 Desktop SETTING LABELS Document Computer EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS My Network File name Places Save as type CSvitab delimited cav Cancel 3 Enter the file name to be saved and click the 8 button 5 The label setting data is saved the save destination 25 3g 8 Q lt LLI ip GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Reading label setting data Read label setting data from CSV files Operating
291. s for Function Blocks 5 11 Common Operations for Setting Labels 5 13 Setting Structured Data Type Labels 5 20 Setting Ranges for Devices Assigned Automatically 5 26 Writing Reading Data to from CSV Files 5 29 gt gt 2 CONFIGURATION SCREEN QJ PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS O o 0 gt og 20 EO 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5 1 Label Setting Screens QcPUL CPU This section shows label setting screens When Use Label is selected on the New Project screen labels are created as shown below Labels are set on each screen according to the type of label For FXCPU a project with labels does not support the SFC language Global Label Setting screen Define labels that can be used for all sequence programs in the project s Section 5 2 Global Label Setting Global1 Navigation Project cs H AA EE Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Global Label JER Device Comment Remark Relation with System Label System Label Name Attribute lt Class MAR GLOBAL Transport Complete Bit M M100 VAR GLOBAL JEmargency Stop Switch Bt Ooo OoOo O VAR GLOBAL CONSTANT v Temperature Control Bit
292. s in a single block Stored coil initial step Initial step i i other than i Step number 0 Reset destination 0 0 step number Stored operation without transition SFC step 0 1 to 511 check n Reset destination Stored operation with transition step number SFC step E Reset initial step Dummy step E i Sn s Including initial steps up to 512 steps in 128 steps for Basic model QCPU Stored operation without transition check Stored operation with transition l i Step number E HERE Reset destination Reset step step number Block start step with END check m Start destination step number Block start step without END check End step UJ j Multiple steps be applied in a single block Category Transition 7 1 List of SFC Symbols Table 7 1 1 List of SFC symbols for QCPU mode LCPU 2 3 Symbol MELSAP3 MELSAP L Selection divergence Remarks OVERVIEW 2 lt 2 2 Selection convergence LL Yz nO Selection convergence D simultaneous divergence Ei 2 32 ru OO X X na Simultaneous divergence
293. s in each programming language for QCPU Q mode LCPU MELSEC Manualfor Structured ve EAE Maia module to Purpose Programming be used Manual Common Special Application Learning details of programmable controller CPU All error codes anguages special relays and special registers Learning the types and details of common instructions Learning the types and details of instructions for Usi intelligent e function modules ladder language Learning the types and details of instructions for network modules Learning the types and details of instructions for the PID control function Learning details Using SFC of specifications functions and instructions of SFC MELSAP3 Learning the fundamentals for creating a structured program language Learning the types and details of common instructions Learning the types and details Using of instructions for structured intelligent ladder FBD function modules or ST Learning the language _ types and details of instructions for network modules Learning the types and details of instructions for the PID control function Learning the types and details of application functions A 16 4 Details of instructions each programming language for FXCPU MELSEC Structured FXCPU Structured Programming Manual FXCPU Programming Manual Programming Purpose Manual amp
294. s meg ati Select gt skjauto Kule MM arning alarm for 5 secs at Auto Operation Star UP i 1143 Initial Process Hal 131 Caut Interruptions Mone In PLC Statement Mote In Peripheral Statement Mote Edit f In PLC InPer Insert Fog Select NE _ Insert Rom Add Row Display Ladder Battom Display in Navigation W Delete Row Find Statement Hote Batch Edit Line Statement Statement I Statement Mote SEES Line Statement Contral 21525651 1 18 operation Preparation 3 GE Auto Operation 4 t o amna slam For S secs at Auto Operation mn Initial Process cout Interruptions 5 Mone In PLC Statement Mote In Peripheral Statementi Mote Edit Type f E In Per Insert Raw Add Row Display Display in Navigation w Ladder Bottom Delete Row Find Jump 01 The line statement one above the selected statement is deleted and the selected statement moves upward 9 18 PRG MAIN Control 21525551 EXE oO Operation Preparation The line stops when ETE Warrurg alarm for 5 secs YO Initial Process SM400 114 m Cout Interruptions x15 ux I PRG MAIN Control 21525551 dd Operation Preparation
295. s not at the old step number it moves to the next searched step number When the _ se button is selected all old step numbers in the specified block are replaced with the new step number EDITING SFC fee PROGRAMS Point Conversion compilation status after replacing step numbers After replacing step numbers the program becomes unconverted uncompiled status Convert or compile the program za lt u LO E LLI LLI N X 8 2 4 Replacing SFC step number on SFC diagram 8 9 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 2 5 Searching for blocks on SFC block list Search for a block or block title on the SFC block list Screen display Select Find Replace gt Jump Block Data Name b zl cancel Operating procedure 1 Setthe items on the screen Item Description Select this to jump to the specified block number Block No When the Data Name is selected the block number corresponds to the Data Name is displayed Select this to jump to the specified data name Data Name When the Block No is selected the data name corresponds to the Block No is displayed 2 Click the button The cursor moves to the specified block 8 10 8 2 5 Searching for blocks on SFC block list 8 2 Searching for Replacing Data in SFC Programs 8 2 6 Searching for devices SFC block list Search for devices on the SFC block list Screen display Select Find R
296. s of Monitoring This section explains how to change the operating conditions of monitoring 12 3 1 Changing current value display format decimal hexadecimal of word type variable Change the current value display format of word type variable displayed during monitoring Changing display format during monitoring Change the current value display format of word type variable during monitoring Operating procedure e Select Online gt Monitor gt Change Value Format Decimal Change Value Format Hexadecimal M0v 01228 MOv 012286 ep H0320 KO 12285 K1 KL 012286 800 HO320 Changing display format before starting monitoring Change the current value display format by setting the option The monitoring starts with the set display format Operating procedure e Select Tool gt Options gt Monitor gt Ladder gt Display Format of Monitoring Value gt Decimal Hexadecimal Display Format of Monitoring Value Decimal Hexadecimal Decimal Hexadecimal MO0v D12286 0 800 012256 k KO 112285 E S00 320 12 4 12 3 1 Changing current value display format decimal hexadecimal of word type variable 12 3 Changing Operating Conditions of Monitoring 12 3 2 Monitoring buffer memory and link memory Select whether to monitor the buffer memory and link memory at monitoring The scan time of the programmable
297. s2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 1 1 Online Change 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common lt Symbolic Information 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common O a WRITING READING DATA CONTROLLER CPU MONITORING EN QJ 0 z 9 lt E 0 Enables the followings calling function block from ladder to ST and from ST to ladder using inline ST in ladder and Function Block Call reducing steps when using function block Value of VAR IN OUT type input label always remains equal to the value of output label Check when program check is not needed after Build or Online Program Change It can reduce the compile time depending on EE the setting Select whether to use the same label name Operational Setting in global label and local label When the same label is selected local label will be given priority By creating cross reference information after compiling time to search cross reference can be reduced Also able to Build Cross Reference inormation search Cross reference information even Common before compiling In this case the specified Find condition will be used as filtering condition Compile Stop Build Set the number of error and warning to stop the compile Sack Output Result ection Register warning codes to invalidate The 10 4 1 Disable Warning Codes registered warning code shall not be displayed
298. se of program assets GX Works2 inherits excellent operational performances from the existing GX Developer Therefore GX Works2 can edit the sequence programs created by the existing GX Developer making it possible to utilize program assets effectively GX Works2 nts oe be RR tb TES New Quee pa Wem eb ED JONG PARET Gag kit uug EE IE OSE bt bo Tn serere GX Developer Program components using function blocks Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help The function blocks be used to convert register ladder blocks that are used repeatedly as components EET ELLE EEE Therefore registered ladder blocks can be easily utilized when mA creating sequence programs amp E3 Function Block E USERFB Function blocks can be used only for a project with labels B ST program editing on ladder editor ST programs can be edited monitored on the ladder editor by using the Inline structured text function The Inline structured text function can be used only for a project with labels 1 3 List of Functions 1 3 List of Functions This section shows the list of functions of GX Works2 The functions are divided into common functions available Project Online Debug Diagnostics Tool
299. sed Instructions EE Ladder example description example Closed contact bX10 LE Rising pulse p pM100 Bu Falling pulse fooo 200 Me Contact equivalent instruction Same as list format lt DO D100 lt D100 H D AD OR 000 f MO MO AND OOO amp OOO amp Li L OOL Indicates a device OR and AND instructions When the OR and AND instructions are combined the AND instruction is given the priority Use to give the higher priority MELSAP L description example Ladder example amp aX1 xO x1 amp aX1 MO XO 0 amp aX1 aMO amp aM1 MO 1 0 x M1 L 0 amp aX1 aMO amp 1 MO Instructions which cannot be used in transition condition programs The following are the instructions which cannot be entered to transition condition programs in MELSAP L Instructions other than the contact instructions and comparison operation instructions 7 38 7 9 2 Creating operation output transition condition programs MELSAP L instruction format 7 9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions 7 9 3 Creating operation output and transition condition programs MELSAP L start conditions format Create operation output and transition condition programs in MELSAP L start conditions format Screen display Select Edit gt SFC Symbol
300. splay hide the Intelligent Function l Guidance Module Guidance window Find Replace Display hide the Find Replace window Common intelligent Function Module toolbar icons The following table shows the Intelligent Function Module toolbar icons son Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference QD75 LD75 Positioning Execute a wave trace of the QD75 LD75 Module Wave Trace positioning module QD75 LD75 Positioning Execute a location trace of the QD 75 Module Location Trace LD75 positioning module Serial Communication Execute a circuit trace of the serial Module Circuit Trace communication module QD75 LD75 Positioning Execute a positioning monitor of the as Mb Intelligent Module Test Monitor QD75 LD75 positioning module a QD75 LD75 Positioning Execute a positioning test of the QD75 Module Test Monitor LD75 positioning module Offset Gain Setting of Execute offset gain setting of the L Temperature Input Module temperature input module Offset Gain Setting of Execute offset gain setting of the analog Analog Module module App 4 Appendix 1 1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys Debug Function toolbar icons The following table shows the Debug Function toolbar icons Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Stop Stopthe step execution dk Cancel 2 step execution Break Execution Execute
301. splaying a line statement on a tree view of the Navigation window Title is appended in front of the line statement Auto Operation x44 CALL FO X2 x4 x5 XB rr 0 4 9 2 2 Entering statements 9 2 Editing Statements and Notes 8 To disable the line statement entry mode select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement 53 again The statement entry mode is disabled STATEMENTS NOTES H O o lt Point Line statements can be entered on the Enter Symbol screen Move the cursor to the left end of the ladder block where a line statement is entered and press the Enter key The Enter Symbol screen is displayed Enter a line statement as shown below Enter a line statement after entering for PLC 5 for Peripheral When displaying a line statement on a project view enter Title after Or CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU PROGRAMS Displaying statements on the editing screen Display hide of statements can be switched by selecting View gt Statement gt Section 2 2 4 lt x C5 T LLI or c5 22 Entering P statements and I statements Enter a P statement or I statement Operating procedure MONITORING s 1 Select Edit gt Documentation gt Statement 53 The statement entry mode is estab
302. st MELSOFT 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES This chapter explains basic operation for editing device comments statements and notes 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 Editing Device Comments 9 2 Editing Statements and Notes 9 2 Batch Editing Statements and Notes 9 13 Changing the Type PLC Peripheral of Statement Note 9 21 Displaying Line Statements on Tree View 9 22 Jumping from Line Statement List 9 27 Merge Process when Reading Programs from Programmable Controller CPU 9 28 Editing SFC 9 30 STATEMENTS NOTES a H Lu O o lt CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE WRITING READING DATA CONTROLLER CPU CD 2 O D O O lt LLI INDEX APPENDIX gt GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES 9 1 Editing Device Comments For the method for editing device comments and the related functions refer to the following manual gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 9 2 Editing Statements and Notes This section explains how to edit statements and notes and the related functions 9 2 1 Statements and notes The following explains the overview of statements and notes and the precautions on editing
303. ste existing ladders Cut Ctr E 8 Ctrl V 6 11 1 Pasting cut or copied ladders in unit of instruction Paste a cut or copied ladder in unit of instruction Restrictions END instructions Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where the instruction is cut or copied m x10 HH TT 2 Select Edit gt Cut 34 or Copy E5 When Cut 44 is selected the instruction at the cursor position is deleted 3 Move the cursor to the position where the cut or copied instruction is pasted 6 11 1 Pasting cut or copied ladders in unit of instruction Cutting and copying in unit of instruction are applicable to contacts coils application instructions device comments and notes Cutting and copying are not applicable to line statements P and I statements and OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE Er GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 4 Select Edit gt Paste The instruction is pasted Pasting in the Insert mode A row is inserted at the cursor position and the instruction is pasted there Pasting position 6 48 6 11 1 Pasting cut or copied ladders in unit of
304. t 58 Statement Note Batch Edit Line Statement P Statement I Statement Note Batch Edit screen for notes ET 17 1 2 63 mote 86 5 109 notes 125 mote Kerr None In PLC CH E n jd Line Statement P Statement I Statement qete Batch Edit screen for I statements EL IStatement I Statement1 Qo Statement2 z 3 t statements Y O Statement Note Batch Edit 2 O None InPLcs Line Statement P Statement lt statement tio Batch Edit screen for P statements gt P Statement Statement 2 Pifr statement1 3 per statement2 Statement Note Batch Edit Line Statement agste He Batch Edit screen for line statements Step Line Statement Djlstatement1 2 15 Statement2 38 statements EYE 5 None In PLC 5 Statement4 StatementS None In PLC Statement Note In Peripheral Statement Note CD 2 O D O O lt Edit Type more In PLC C InPeripheral Change Type Insert Row f Line _ Add Row Display Display in Navigation Window Ladder Betten Delete Row Find x Q Jump Cancel i A lt gt lt LLI Q 2 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS STATEMENTS NOTES Display contents Item Description Display the batc
305. t Data Struct1 To reflect the changes of the table above to the ease system label database ation please save the project after compiling Register Device Name Label Name Data Type Device Word Signed TRUCT1_data3 Eee STRUCT1 data4 Double Word Signed STRUCT1 datab FLOAT Single Precision PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS Use Bit Designation Automatic Filling SETTING LABELS Operating procedure e Set the items on the screen LU Q Item Description Q 2 Label Name Display label names defined as structure 9 z Data Type Display data types set to label names Device Set device names to be assigned EE Check this to set devices automatically to cells in which devices are not set with the 7 Automatic Filling same data type Use Bit Designation Check this to specify a bit device of word device Er Point OY Display on the Local Label Setting screen For the Structure Device Setting screen the read only screen is displayed 8 a lt TO N X 5 6 2 Setting data type as structure Ra GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Entering device names automatically The Automatic filling function can be used when setting series of devices for the same data type data on the Structure Device Setting screen When using the Automatic filling function whether to use bit specification of word device can be
306. t gt Ladder Symbol gt Horizontal Line The Enter HLine screen is displayed Enter HLine 4 to 7 E gem ae Stop at the connection point 3 Enter K desired number Enter HLine 4 to 7 E Lx er Stop at the connection point 6 16 6 2 6 Opening label setting screen for program being edited 6 2 Entering Instructions 4 Clickthe gt button The wrapping source symbol gt is entered and the row is wrapped Wrapping source symbol gt OVERVIEW 5 Move the cursor to the position where a wrapping destination symbol gt is 2 entered When entering wrapping destination symbol gt move the cursor to the first column 209 10 X20 x30 x40 5 EE EE SE G 3 55 6 Select Edit gt Ladder Symbol gt Horizontal Line zd The Enter HLine screen is displayed d Enter HLine 0 to 11 X Slam fo ext Skop at the connection point Enter K number input in step 3 PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS wrapping source symbol gt and a wrapping destination symbol gt are used in pairs for wrapping symbols Enter the same number for the paired wrapping symbols Enter HLine Oto 11 lo ext Stop at the connection point SETTING LABELS 8 Click the button The wrapping destination symbol gt is entered EDITING LADDER JJ P
307. t Device Comment Device Label Device Label Comment For the method for entering device comments refer to the following manual lt gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Point Entering device comments device comment can be entered following the ladder symbol entry by clicking on the Enter Symbol screen lt gt Section 6 2 1 6 14 6 2 4 Entering device comments 6 2 Entering Instructions 6 2 5 Entering pointer numbers and interrupt pointer numbers Enter pointer number or an interrupt pointer number Pointer numbers or interrupt pointer numbers are entered by using the Enter Symbol screen Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where pointer number or an interrupt pointer number is entered Enter pointer number or an interrupt pointer number at the position where step number is displayed 2 Press the Enter key The Enter Symbol screen is displayed 3 Enter a pointer number or an interrupt pointer number Enter Symbol 512 4 Click the gt button The entered pointer number or interrupt pointer number is displayed on the editing screen ES tt x200 200 9 END 6 2 5 Entering pointer numbers and interrupt pointer numbers 6 15 OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1
308. t is necessary En cancel Open Zoom with Mew Window of the option setting to open Zoom by Ehe automatic when SFC auto scroll monitor Is the option setting cancelled Displaying start destination block and starting monitoring during the auto scroll monitoring For QCPU mode LCPU when the active step is moved to the start destination block during the auto scroll monitoring the SFC editor of the start destination block can be opened and monitored automatically by checking the Monitor block start with new window item under Tool gt Options gt Monitor gt SFC gt SFC Auto Scroll Setting 12 10 12 5 1 Monitoring SFC diagrams 12 5 Monitoring SFC Programs 12 5 2 Monitoring transitions Monitor SFC steps that do not transfer after passing the specified time using the transition monitoring function Operating procedure 1 Select Tool gt Options gt Monitor gt SFC and set the items in the Transition Watch Monitor For details of the setting items refer to Section 13 2 J H Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES CONVERTING ma TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING Transition Watch Monitor Watch Step Not Transferring within Watching Time PFrogram Program File Mame MAINI f Target All Blocks PROGRAMS f Specify the Block Detail Se Monitoring Time 5 Minute 10 Second Stop Transition Watch Monitor when Detected
309. t memory 11 3 J Z LU gt 9 LU STATEMENTS NOTES CONVERTING E PROGRAMS eee SEN COMPILING WRITING READING DATA oz LLI 474 CD 2 O D O O lt LLI INDEX APPENDIX gt GX Works2 11 WRITING READING DATA TO FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Screen button System Image Displays the illustration of the connection channel list Parameter Program Selects the parameters and all programs displayed in the list Select al selects all data displayed in the list Cancel al Selections Cancels the selection status of all data displayed in the list Related Functions gt gt Related Functions Switches display hide of the Related functions button For details of the related functions refer to the following manual GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Q Acquire Symbolic Information Project Mame Read from PLC Delete PLC Data only Displays the project name of the symbolic information in the Title Project Name column It is not displayed for projects without labels and FXCPU Refresh Updates data list on the Online Data Operation screen For QCPU mode LCPU updates writing size free space volume and used space volume When multiple personal computers are connected to the programmable control
310. t transition condition programs within approximate 2k steps For details of maximum number of sequence steps that can be created refer to the following manual lt gt MELSEC Q L QnA Programming Manual SFC SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC 5 2 lt zE c lt LLI 02 REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS 7 7 Sorting SFC Step Transition Numbers of SFC Diagram rm cru This section explains how to sort SFC step transition numbers of created SFC diagram Screen display Select Edit gt Sort SFC Step No Sort SFC Step No m Sorting Order Set START Block Number le StepNo Before Change After Change Descending Change START Block Number Change c Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Sorting Order Select whether to sort SFC step transition numbers in ascending or descending order Change START Block Number Set START Block When the Change is selected set the start destination block number of the block start step Number that is changed when sorting SFC step transition numbers Check this to change the start block number 2 Click the button The sorting of SFC step transition numbers is executed according to the set content Point Difference of sorting result according to the sort order The following figures show the sortin
311. tacts 21 contacts Point Precautions when changing the number of contacts to be displayed When the number of contacts is changed from the one used to create a ladder program to a less number of contacts the program is not displayed properly in the following conditions In this case set the number of contacts back to the original setting When an instruction cannot be placed in the input ladder part or output ladder part of function block When the number of rows for a single ladder block exceeds 24 PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS The following is an example of program in which instructions cannot be placed in the input ladder part of function block when a program created with 17 contacts is changed to 11 contacts SETTING LABELS lt Display with 17 contacts gt PRG MAIN B input1 output B LLI 25 lt Display with 11 contacts gt Da f PRG MAIN 7 26 Ladder program with 13 contacts or more The selection of 13 contacts or more is available from GX Works2 Version 1 48 or later 8 Change the setting as follows when using Developer concurrently or using Works2 Version 1 43V earlier e Set the same setting as the product running concurrently for Display Connection of Ladder Diagram in the option setting For a program with 13 contacts or more adjust the program for number of contacts to be 11 or less OT N X 2
312. tacts and coils Ladder symbols can also be entered by entering only devices labels at the specified position They are entered as coils when they are connected to the right base line or output devices Y DY are entered For other circumstances they are entered as contacts When more than one character of an instruction label is entered instructions labels whose first characters match are displayed The instruction label can be entered by selecting with the up down key If the entry field is blank an instruction label can be selected by pressing the Ctrl Space keys Details of instruction label can be checked with the tool hint guments 3 D Explanation BIN 32 bit multiplication 2 DABCD 2 DABIN 2 DAND amp DATE amp DATERD When the instruction is entered the argument that is used for that instruction is displayed in the tool hint The next instruction option is displayed by clicking the tool hint or by pressing the Ctrl shift At Enter keys CI ick Active step batch readout instructions 2 2 MOV BIN 16 bit S BIN 16 bit D gt gt NEXT 16 bit data transfer 1 2 MOV BIN 16 bit S BIN 16 gt gt Enter Symbol ESP mv OK Exi Help Allowable number of rows for creating ladders A maximum number of rows that can be used for one ladder block is 24 lines A maximum number of rows that can be processed in
313. te one ladder block at a time Operating procedure 1 Place the cursor at the start position of deletion and drag it up or down to set the range Specify the range of a ladder block at the position where step numbers are displayed C9 G Me Y70 x10 x11 x12 x13 x14 x15 8 Y71 N Y72 Drag TO Y73 23 END X END 2 Press the Delete key The ladder block is deleted v 6 7 3 Deleting a ladder block 6 37 OVERVIEW Gd CONFIGURATION 9 gt gt lt PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER md PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt c lt LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 8 Deleting Lines This section explains how to delete lines Delete Vertical Line p 2 ct ie H Delete Horizontal Line Delete horizontal line 6 8 1 Deleting lines et e a m lil i HE 3 h ct T Delete vertical and horizontal lines consecutively Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the position where the lines are deleted The vertical line is deleted taking the left edge of the cursor as a base point 2 Select Edit Delete Line 2 3 Drag the cursor in the direction for line deletion The sel
314. ted but a trigger is not generated After Trigger Indicate the status sampling trace is executed and a trigger is generated x Completion a Stop Indicate the status sampling trace is 1 interrupted a Indicate the status sampling trace has ended normally by acquiring trace data HOPEN up to the specified total number of samplings after generation of a trigger Indicate the status a sampling trace error Error occurred during sampling trace Displayed when the trace data have 100 Buffer Status been acquired up to the specified total number of samplings 2 z Trigger Occurrence Displayed when a trigger is generated during sampling trace Appendix 1 5 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result App 9 GX Works2 APPENDIX Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Zoom the scale of timing chart Zoom the scale of trend graph Switch the trace result display on the i Switch Chart Detail sampling Trace screen between the timing chart graph and the detailed data value Appendix 1 7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for program editors B Ladder toolbar icons and shortcut keys The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the ladder editor resi Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Insert an open contact at the cursor 4r
315. tem can be set only for ladder programs of the project without labels 2 Click the Execute button MELSOFT Series GX Works2 The message shown on the right is displayed Change the specified TC setting 3 Click the Yes button The setting values are changed 6 15 Changing Setting Values Point Changing setting values Constants can be changed to devices and devices can be changed to constants For the high speed counter of FXCPU changing from constants to devices and from devices to constants cannot be performed online Example K10 to DO Devices with index setting cannot be specified Example D10Z0 cannot be set OVERVIEW When a ZR device is set or changed the changed setting value cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU Example ZR100 to D100 cannot be set For Basic model QCPU When the date of the personal computer is February 29 the setting values not be changed 5 5 For measures when the values cannot be changed refer to GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual ae Common 3 For Universal model QCPU LCPU Whether to transfer content of the program cache memory to the program memory after setting TC values be selected by setting the option Check the Transfer program cache memory to program memory item under S Tool gt Options gt Online Change zu following functions cannot be executed while transferr
316. tem label information 1 Click the mies button The Change Contents of System Label Database screen is displayed Change Contents of System Label Database Find Subject Whole Display Find Characters Find Import Contents System Label List Name System Label Name Label Name Data Constant Project Name Device Attribute Comment Remark Before Change List1 global_bit2 global_bit2 i QO6UDHCPU Simple 02 11151 List 1 global bit2 global bit2 QOSUDHCPU Simple 02 J1 x11 i SystemLabel2 3 Before Change Listi global bit1 global bitl Bi QOSUDHCPU Simple 02 J11x0 After Change List 1 global biti global biti QOSUDHCPU Simple 02 21 10 SystemLabell Relationship diagram between system label database 1 and project 2 Import Cancel 9 2 3 Change Notification Function M Function Bex 73 EL 2 Click the meet button The information on the changed system labels are applied to the project When the tai button is clicked these changes will be updated at the next update 3 The following message is displayed MELSOFT Series GX Works i The latest information of system label being referred was reflected to the global label The reflected global label changed into uncompiled Please compile again 4 Click the gt button OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt De
317. the lt lt Detail Verify Result gt gt tab being displayed ormon Close All Detail Result Close all lt lt Detail Verify Result gt gt tabs being displayed Return to Result List 1 12 1 3 1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 3 List of Functions B List of functions for executing sampling trace The following tables show the functions for executing sampling trace View function for executing sampling trace Reference Result Position Switching Display Items Display hide the display item titles Common Timing Chart Scale Narrow Scale ae Change the display width of the timing chart scale Common Wide Scale Trend Graph Scale Wide Scale Change the display width of the trend graph scale Common Initial Display Common Ney OVERVIEW SCREEN CONFIGURATION 9 lt lt De 9 O 2 a PROCEDURE Additional Information Display hide the additional information Common Debug function for executing sampling trace Reference Sampling Trace Open Sampling Trace Display the Sampling Trace screen Trace Setting Miss the screen on which the sampling trace conditions Start Trace Start sampling trace Stop Trace Suspend sampling trace Execute Manual Trigger Generate a trigger at any given timing Write trace settings to the programmable controller CPU Execute this to control the sampling trace start by Register Trace s
318. the lt lt Device gt gt tab of PLC parameters display range of D 0 to 12287 range of latch D 5000 to 6000 5 7 Setting Ranges for Devices Assigned Automatically FXCPU Screen display Select Tool gt Device Label Automatic Assign Setting Device Label Automatic Assign Setting OVERVIEW Word Range Bit Range n R M 512 Bi 399 El 2840 ES to 7679 Taj z Timers Pointer 100 1 to 405 H a2 100 to ral 1 ms T 5 220 281 Step Flags nO Retentive 2048 4095 3 Counters D 100 At Z tid gt D cm iR OO c Aa Operating procedure Select the device type and set the start and end addresses to be assigned automatically 5 7 1 Precautions on automatically assigned devices PROGRAM Sy CONFIGURATIONS Precautions when changing automatically assigned devices All programs need to be compiled when the range of automatically assigned device is changed Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels Therefore device values set before the program change remain on the device assigned labels For QCPU mode LCPU reset the programmable controller CPU clear all device memories including latches clear all file registers then switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN for a precautionary measure GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common For the
319. the break execution du Step Execution Execute the step execution J Z LU gt 9 STATEMENTS NOTES Execution Option Display the Execution Option screen of step execution TT 2 T lt lt Set Cancel Break Point Set a break point at the cursor position ce or cancel the set break point 555 Enable Disable Break Enable disable the break point at the z Point cursor position 1 1 tg 0 Cancel All Break Points Cancel all break points omen iB 7 Break Point Window Display the Break Point window D ET 62 171 Cancel All Break Devices Cancel all break devices lt gt fa F Break Device Window Display the Break Device window 28 er Set Cancel Skip Range Set a skip range or cancel the set skip 558 Eu z O ne Enable Disable Skip Enable disable the skip range at the cal cursor position Cancel All Skip Ranges Cancel all skip ranges Skip Range Window Display the Skip Range window 2 X Other shortcut keys 2 gt The following table shows other shortcut keys that are available regardless of the editing target 13 icc Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference Change the name of the selected data or 2 library in the Navigation window Delete Delete the selected data Shift Paste the copied data to a folder Add the intelligent function module data 7 J Ctr
320. tically 5 7 1 Precautions on automatically assigned devices Writing Reading Data to from CSV Files 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 1 6 2 6 3 Creating Ladders 6 1 1 Switching between overwrite mode and insert mode 6 1 2 Switching between write mode and read Entering Instructions 6 2 1 Entering contacts coils and application instructions 6 2 2 joe 6 2 3 Selecting the duplicated coil check function 6 2 4 Entering device comments 4 0 0 nnn 6 2 5 Entering pointer numbers and interrupt pointer numbers 6 2 6 Opening label setting screen for program being edited 6 2 7 Creating Wrapping TOWS eee Using Function Blocks 6 3 1 Creating function blocks 3 1to3 4 5 1 to 5 32 5 2 5 3 6 3 2 Pasting function blocks to sequence 6 19 6 3 3 Creating input and output ladder parts of function 6 21 6 3 4 Changing FB instance names of pasted function blocks 6 22 6 3 5 Displaying function block ladder programs 6 23 6 3 6 Precautions on using
321. tically This section explains how to set the ranges for devices that are automatically assigned to local labels The devices set as automatically assigned device are assigned to labels during compilation lt Section 10 3 B QCPU mode LCPU Screen display Select Tool gt Device Label Automatic Assign Setting Device Label Automatic Assign Setting Set a device range to automatically assign to labels Labels will be assigned From its way down the displayed device list when multiple devices are selected Assignment Range Total Points PLC Parameter Stat End Device Setting Range El Word Device mes E VAR Range 6144 12297 0 i Latch EP VAR RETAIN Rang Latch 1 Dtatch 10 O watch 16 7 selection Bit Device field ee M Ji w a as VAR RETAIN Range Latch 1 LLatch 10 O um BLath 16 O HETE A Pointer El Timer ance i VAR Range T 10 64 2 i VAR RETAINRange Latch 1 10 O A Retentive Timer per i WAR Range ee mme e ST i VAR RETAIN Range Latch 1 sTtath 10 O A Counter i VAR Range 1023 i VAR RETAINRange Latch 1 Ctath 10 O ENSE Latch 1 Able to clear the value by using a latch clear key Latch 2 Unable to clear the value by
322. tion 6 12 Canceling Previous Operation This section explains how to cancel the previous operation to restore the previous status e a OVERVIEW 2 Operating procedure Z e Select Edit gt Undo immediately after editing a ladder processing status just before the last operation is restored Dc 3 6 12 1 Operation applicability x D F The following table shows the operation applicability of the Undo function ag c X na Table 6 12 1 1 Operation applicability of the Undo function Operation applicability of the Undo function Reference 2 Create and delete contacts coils and application instructions pen DE Section 6 7 2 Insert and delete rows Section 6 9 2 5 Insert and delete columns Section 6 9 5 Section 6 6 c o i i a0 Edit and delete lines Section 68 Enter and delete vertical lines SACHON De 2 Section 6 8 2 Section 6 6 2 Enter and delete horizontal lines Section 6 8 2 Cut and paste by setting ranges Section 6 11 ep SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER 44 PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 12 1 Operation applicability 6 53 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 13 Restoring Ladders to the Status of After Conversion This section explains how to restore the currently edited ladder to the status of immediately after the ladder conversion Operating procedure 1
323. tion Section 6 9 Insert Insert Column Insert column at the cursor position Ctrl Deletel Delete Column Delete the column at the cursor position Connect Line to Right Side Connect a horizontal line to the ladder i Ctrl Shift T P Symbol symbol at the right of the cursor position Connect Line to Left Side Connect a horizontal line to the ladder fi Ctrl Shift Symbol symbol at the left of the cursor position 2 ection 6 Enter Delete HLine Enter delete a line at the right of the Enter Delete HLine Enter delete a line at the left of the Appendix 1 7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors App 11 GX Works2 APPENDIX Shortcut key Corresponding menu Description Reference Enter Delete VLine Enter delete a line at the downward of Ctr Downward the cursor position Section 6 6 Enter Delete VLine Enter delete a line at the upward of the Ctr LO Upward cursor position Switch Open Close Switch a open contact to closed contact Common Ctrl Contact and vice versa Ctrl c PREMIE Change the type of a statement note Section 9 4 Open the Enter Symbol screen in which Ctrl Alt Enter Instruction Partial Edit the first argument is in the selected status EB Select a device label on the Enter Symbol screen Switch the device label Ar to be selected using the button Increment decrement a dev
324. tion 6 3 4 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 3 Section 7 4 Section 7 5 Section 7 8 Section 7 9 Section 7 10 Section 7 11 Section 8 2 Chapter 10 Section 11 1 Section 12 5 Section 13 2 Appendix 1 Chapter 4 to Chapter 12 are changed to Chapter 5 to Chapter 13 Section 5 4 to Section 5 12 are changed to Section 5 6 to Section 5 14 Section 7 1 1 Section 7 1 2 Section 7 1 3 Section 7 1 5 Correction MANUALS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL Section 1 3 1 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Section 6 4 5 Section 13 1 Section 13 2 Appendix 1 2 Print date Manual number Revision Jan 2010 SH NA 080780ENG E Model Addition 102 L26 BT CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Correction MANUALS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL Section 1 2 Section 1 3 Section 2 1 Section 2 2 9 Section 4 1 Section 5 2 Section 6 2 2 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 4 Section 6 10 Section 6 15 Section 7 9 Section 7 11 2 Section 9 2 1 Section 9 4 Section 9 7 Section 10 2 1 Section 11 1 Section 12 4 Chapter 13 Appendix 1 Apr 2010 SH NA 080780ENG F Model Addition Q50UDEH Q100UDEH LJ72GF15 T2 Addition Section 2 3 3 Section 2 3 6 Section 7 2 Section 7 8 2 Section 7 8 3 Section 7 13 Section 7 14 Correction MANUALS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL Section 1 2 Section 1 3 Section 2 3 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 2 Section
325. tions This explains restrictions relating to the information given on the same page A 19 Symbols used in this manual The following shows the symbols used in this manual with descriptions and examples MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Unset Project PRG Write POU 01 1 Step Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help DB Ale EI coe G m SVARAR EE tt AP LO Q Parameter Setting OOOO PLC Name PLC System puc File PLC RAS Boot File Program Device 1 0 Assignment Multiple CPU Setting Timer Limit Setting Low Speed 100 ms 1ms 1000ms Common Pointer No P 2048 After 0 4095 High Speed 10 0 ms 0 1ms 100ms Points Occupied by Empty Slot 16 Points RUN PAUSE Contacts RUN x X0 X1FFF System Interrupt Setting Interrupt Counter Start No C 0 768 PALISE X X0 X1FFF Fixed Scan Interval 128 100 0 129 40 0 D 5ms 1000ms ms ms Remote Reset I30 20 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms ms Allow I31 10 0 0 5ms 1000ms High Speed Interrupt Setting 0 5ms 1000ms No Symbol Example pee C sn m M Button on a screen High Speed Interrupt Setting button rea 9 9 910 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL This manual uses the generic terms and abbreviations listed in the following table to discuss the software packages and pr
326. to Section 8 1 2 are changed to Section 8 1 2 to Section 8 1 3 Section 8 2 2 to Section 8 2 5 are changed to Section 8 2 3 to Section 8 2 6 Section 9 6 to Section 9 7 are changed to Section 9 7 to Section 9 8 Section 10 2 5 is changed to Section 10 3 3 Section 12 3 3 is changed to Section 12 2 5 Appendix 1 2 to Appendix 1 8 are changed to Appendix 1 3 to Appendix 1 9 Sep 2011 SH NA 080780ENG K Section 1 3 1 Section 2 2 5 Section 6 6 2 Section 6 8 2 Section 8 2 2 Jul 2011 SH NA 080780ENG J O NO TU TU 00 Japanese Manual Version SH 080731 P This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi integrated FA software MELSOFT series Before using the product thoroughly read this manual to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ss A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT A 2 Fo Ns Le A 3 INTRODUC TION Guarda eee die HI A 6 CONTENTS RER 6 MANUALS sl A 12 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS
327. to be cut or copied 2 Select Edit gt Cut Copy and cut or copy the SFC diagram in the specified range 3 Move the cursor to the position where the cut copied SFC diagram is pasted 4 Select Edit gt Paste The Paste Data screen is displayed Paste Data ActioniTransition fw Step and TR Comments 7 6 Cutting copying pasting SFC diagrams Set the items on the screen Item Description Check this to paste the cut copied data including operation output transition condition sequence programs Step and TR Comments Check this to paste the cut copied data including SFC step transition comments Action Transition OVERVIEW Click the button The cut copied SFC diagram is pasted 2 Note that the conversion error occurs when the divergence convergence line is correct after 2 lt pasting data Edit the SFC diagram and convert the program again 24 ii cz OO NO y 25 OO OO c X na PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Point Pasting position If the start position of the cut copied SFC diagram is a SFC step it cannot be pasted at the position of transition and if the start position is a transition it cannot be pasted at the position of SFC step Change the pasting position one row up or down and paste the data again Operation output transition condition programs to be pasted Paste operation outpu
328. to the programmable controller CPU Pressing the Find FEND button will search For FEND SRET IRET instructions Programs including these instructions will be indicated by an asterisk corresponding to the instruction used This does not include uncompiled instructions Please check that programs with subroutines or interrupt routines are after the last program containing FEND instruction PLC write replaces END instructions with NOP instructions between programs Operating procedure e Select row and click the Move Up Mowe Down button to change the order 6 16 Setting Program Linkage Order FXCPU Screen button Specify Move Destination Displays the Specify Move Destination screen Specify the destination for program to be moved OVERVIEW Specify Move Destination or Source Range End 2 MAINZ Cancel e uu Move Destination 4 SUBZ m nO Operation 1 Set the items on the screen Zu ee D Item Description T Q Moving Source Range Select a first program and end program of moving source range 2 Move Destination Select a program of move destination or Move to End PEE 2 Click ee button The programs selected for Moving Source Range are moved to the rows above the program selected for Move Destination When Move to End is selected for Move Destination the programs are
329. to the programmable controller CPU 7 Chapter 11 Write sequence programs to the programmable controller CPU Es l Lb H H 8 Checking the operation Procedure Reference Monitor the execution status of sequence programs Chapter 12 2 lt 5 25 Ow 9 Ending the project Procedure Reference O Save the project GX Works2 Version 1 T2 Operating Manual Exit GX Works2 Common 20 a Z lt IO 65 NX GX Works2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE MEMO SWVYDONd OO 94S ONILIGS GNV HONV3S SWVYSONd YIGAVT ONILIGS SNOILVYNDIANOO LO S I38V ONILLAS NVYDOUd M3IAHINO IN NOLLVYNDISNOO 169 ei N33HOS ONIINIAVHOOMd T Program Configurations of Simple Project c lt 14 Q LL c O Q O E 72 prar 2 ucl c O i O C prar 72 5 gt lt O Kan 4 1 4 OS MELSOFT GX Works2 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 1 Program Configurations of Simple Project This section explains the configurations of Simple project that are displayed in a tree format in the Project view The display contents differ according to the programmable controller type and the project type The fo
330. truction is entered incompletely or the entered instruction is not supported the Find Instruction gt gt tab is displayed on the Instruction Help screen when the Display Instruction Help at symbol error occurrence item is checked in the option setting If the starting characters of the instructions match with the entered characters the corresponding instructions are displayed Search method can be switched by clicking the Forward Match Partial Match button Instruction Help Instruction Selection Find Instruction Search Instruction 1 Instruction List MOVP K3M0 D100 MOWP 2 Forward Match Partial Match Active step batch readout instructions Executes a batch readout of the operation statuses active inactive of steps a specified block Details Cancel Checking instructions The specified instruction can be checked on the Instruction Help screen displayed by right clicking and selecting Open Instruction Help from the shortcut menu Details of instruction Details of the instruction can be displayed by clicking the Browse Manual button on the Detail Instruction Help screen L GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 6 12 6 2 2 Instruction help 6 2 Entering Instructions 6 2 3 Selecting the duplicated coil check function Check duplicated coils in the same program when entering coil to a ladder converted program The duplicated coil check function can be set by setting
331. ts on SFC block list 7 43 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 11 3 Displaying SFC diagram from SFC block list Display the SFC diagram of the block at the cursor position on the SFC block list Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the block to be displayed 2 Select View Open SFC Body or double click the block to be displayed 7 11 4 Displaying Local Label Setting screen from SFC block list Display the Local Label Setting screen of the block at the cursor position on the SFC block list Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the block to be displayed 2 Select View Open Header 7 44 7 11 3 Displaying SFC diagram from SFC block list 7 12 Setting Parameters for 5 Programs 7 12 Setting Parameters for SFC Programs mmm This section explains how to set parameters for SFC programs among the parameter settings for operating the programmable controller CPU OVERVIEW O 7 12 1 SFC settings in PLC parameter c 29 T oet parameters for SFC programs in PLC parameter 23 Screen display 3 Select Project view gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt lt lt SFC gt gt Z 0 Parameter Setting z PLC PLC System PLC File PLCRAS Boot File Program SFC 1 0 Assignment Multiple CPU Setting OO OO ra SFC Program Start Mode Initial Start C Resume Start Start Conditions Autostart Block 0 Do not
332. tting Program Linkage Order FXCPU 29593 For FXCPU simple project with labels execution program be divided into multiple programs unit of processes These programs are linked as one program when writing them to a programmable controller CPU This section explains how to set the linkage order For creating a new program refer to the following manual 037 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Program linkage order setting i MAIN1 GA gt No Program name MAIN MAIN3 MAINZ gt MAIN gt MAIN2 Link 1 Write to PLC MAIN H4 ato 5 i we we ee Maximum of 64 programs Screen display Select Project view gt Program Setting gt Execution Program gt MAIN Right click and select Program Linkage Order Setting from the shortcut menu Program Linkage Order Setting fr 2 manz Move Up Move Down Fl il apm Il gt as Find FEND 0 Set the program linkage order single execution program linked in the specified order will be written
333. tured text 2 ST Select whether to display listed label names Structured Instruction label name prediction starting with the input character when a character is input Structured text label name inline structured text instruction and label name Tabulator Length Set tab length It is not available with inline structured text 13 3 GX Works2 13 SETTING OPTIONS Block List Display device comment on SFC block list Section 7 11 Comment Step Transition Display step transition comment on SFC Section editor 2 3 4 000 Set SFC edit area when create SFC Please Sector SFC Edit Area change by SFC Row Setting after creating 255 a SFC 77 Select whether to Zoom windows at the cursor position on SFC when opening SFC Tile SFC and Zoom vertically diagram window Checking this option changes the Open Zoom with New Window option into unchecked Editor window SFC Display Window Select window display ratio for SFC when Ratio Tile Vertically is selected Section 7 9 Set display lines for MELSAP L program Format Jurnp to start destination block Set whether to jump to start destination block when cursor is moved to block start step Select whether to open new window for each Zoom or to change the display in the Zoom Open Zoom with New Window fixed window when opening Zoom Checking this option changes the Tile SFC and Zoom vertically option into un
334. un as they are the programs may be processed with the device values set before the program change After compiling all programs clear the device values set before the program change by the following procedure Note that by setting the following option device values in the range set in the device label automatic assign setting can be automatically cleared to O after writing programs to the programmable controller CPU Tool 2 Options gt When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation clear the device ranges set in the Device Label Auto Assign setting to 0 1 QCPU mode LCPU only 9 o 2 zi zz S Ok LL Oz Z KEE Gar 2 10 CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE e QCPU mode LCPU 1 Switch the programmable controller CPU to STOP gt PROGRAMS 2 Select Online Write to PLC and write programs to the programmable controller CPU 3 Switch the programmable controller CPU to RESET It can also be reset by selecting Compile gt Remote Operation lt x Q T LLI oc c CONTROLLER CPU 4 Select Online PLC Memory Operation Clear PLC Memory to clear the memories If VAR_RETAIN is used in the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting clear all device memories including latches If file registers are used in the Device Label Automatic Assign Setting clear all file registers e FXCPU 1 Switch th
335. used in 21 a g ct m E CONVERTING TO FROMPROGRAMMABLE COMPILING CONTROLLER CPU EK sp ect MILL E PROGRAMS 8 zi L E lt x Q T LLI oc c m Ctrl L Line Statement List ihe program Section 9 6 Insert a template corresponds to the Ctrl T Ait E F1 Display Template instruction function control syntax Set argument of the template the d Mark Template Left selected status from the left by selecting Structured the menu each time Set an argument of the template in the ja Mark Template Right selected status from the right by selecting the menu each time xus Switch the mode of the open window to I Shift 2 Read Mode Read Mode O lt c O Z O o 2 4 Switch the mode of the open window to 6 1 2 gt Write Mode Write Mode Switch the mode of the open window to FS Monitor Mode during monitoring Switch the mode of the open window to Section 12 2 7 iat Monitor Write Mode Monitor Write Mode during monitoring Display devices assigned by Section Change the display magnification ratio of Section 2 Shift Insert Insert a row at the cursor position Shift Delete Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor posi
336. vel may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Instructions NWARNING When data change program change or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole system always operates safely Furthermore for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU the corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as a system Startup Maintenance Instructions N CAUTION The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU Program change when a programmable controller CPU is RUN operating status changes such as forced input output operation and RUN STOP switching and remote control operation must be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured When changing a program while a programmable controller CPU is RUN it may cause a program corruption in some operating conditions Fully understand the precautions described in GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common before use The positioning test
337. vertical line Operating procedure 1 Select Edit gt Delete Line 2 Specify the range to be deleted by dragging the cursor After dragging the lines in the specified range are deleted 7 28 7 4 2 Deleting only divergence convergence vertical lines 7 5 Changing SFC Step Attributes 7 5 Changing SFC Step Attributes rm cru This section explains how to change the SFC step attribute Operating procedure 1 Move the cursor to the SFC step whose attribute is to be changed 2 Select Edit gt SFC Step Attribute No Attribute Stored Coil Stored Operation without Transition Check Stored Operation with Transition Check Reset Edit gt SFC Step Attribute gt Stored Coil Point Operation output sequence program after the SFC step attribute is changed Even when the SFC step attribute is changed the operation output sequence program already created remains as it is OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SCREEN QJ 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS SETTING LABELS EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS On 0 oc 7 lt 9 EKO Av 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 6 Cutting copying and pasting SFC diagrams This section explains how to cut copy and paste the SFC diagram Operating procedure 1 Specify the range
338. vices 10 13 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 3 3 Precautions on compilation When the multiple types of devices are assigned automatically QCPU Q mode LCPU If a program or label is changed and executed Build repeatedly the number of used device is increased and assignable devices is decreased since the devices assigned once cannot be used Execute Rebuild All When D W R ZR are selected as automatically assigned device concurrently devices are assigned from D W If the number of D W is not enough devices are assigned from R ZR Note that the control timing may change depending on the program content since the operation processing times of D W and R differ from that of ZR For details of operation processing time refer to the following manual L MELSEC Q L Structured Programming Manual Common Instructions When array type labels are used When devices labels are used for indexes in array type labels the compilation result is created with the devices shown below Note that the device values may be overwritten when the following devices are used in user programs Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU ZO Z1 Universal model QCPU LCPU Z16 to 19 FXCPU ZO VO Compiling programs when adding changing labels When programs are compiled after adding changing labels devices are reassigned to labels in uncompiled POUS only Since previous device values may remain
339. w OVERVIEW With the activated Zoom editor window a cursor of the SFC editor window can be moved 5 Select the direction to move cursor by selecting View gt Move SFC Cursor gt Up Down Left Right snr VED zo When the cursor of the SFC editor window is moved the cursor of the Zoom editor window moves to the corresponding position Opening the Zoom 3 If Tile SFC and Zoom vertically is not selected in the option setting the Zoom editor window can be opened by selecting View gt Open Zoom Start Destination Block To open the Zoom hold the ct key and double click the corresponding SFC step transition of the SFC S 2 Y diagram or press the cte and keys To return to the SFC diagram from the Zoom editor window press the Ctr and keys e e X Y Instructions that can be used in the Zoom editor window aa For details of unavailable instructions for operation outputs transition conditions refer to the following manual gt gt MELSEC Q L QnA Programming Manual SFC Statements and pointers cannot be entered For transition conditions notes cannot be entered as well Entering a dummy coil to transition conditions Only one dummy TRAN for the coil instruction can be entered To enter a dummy coil select Edit gt Ladder Symbol gt Coil and clicking the OR button enters a dummy coil automatical
340. ward direction from the Find Direction Down from current step gh current step position Select this to execute a search in the range set by the entered step Specify step range 2 Click the frir button The cursor moves to the searched old module I O number 3 Click the hane or c button change the I O number The old module I O numbers are replaced with the new module I O numbers and the search for the old module I O numbers continues If the t l button is clicked all searched old module I O numbers are batch replaced with the new module I O numbers 4 Click the Close button to end the batch replace function 8 4 8 1 3 Changing the module start I O numbers 8 1 Searching for Replacing Data Ladder Programs Precautions on replacing module start I O numbers QCPU mode LCPU The following explains the precautions on replacing module start I O numbers Specification of the module I O number e When specifying a module I O number specify the actual module I O number Example OVERVIEW 2 gt 3 5 0 2 o O O fs 2 5 6 as OQ Q E O nO X0000 0010 X0020 X0030 0040 Y0050 Y0070 0080 to to to to to to to to 2 XOOOF X001F X002F X003F 004F Y006F YOO7F 008 D Start input number of the 5 T read data H40 e r na Replacing module start I O numbers of intelligent function module devices Use the device r
341. wing table shows the display contents of the screen x dn Name Description e e Allow consecutive entry of ladder symbols by changing the setting to consecutive entry EE Consecutive ladder symbol status entry button Consecutive entry I Consecutive entry OFF Allow device comment entry after ladder symbol by changing the setting to consecutive Consecutive device entry status comment entry button E Consecutive entry ON a Consecutive entry OFF Ladder symbol selection Allow changing the setting of ladder symbols field Clicking the button displays the list of ladder symbols Instruction device entry field Enter an instruction and or a device PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS 3 Enter an instruction and or a device Enter Symbol SETTING LABELS 4 Click the button The entered ladder symbol is displayed on the editing screen EDITING LADDER JJ PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 6 2 1 Entering contacts coils and application instructions 6 7 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Simple editing of devices labels when entering ladder symbols Edit a device label on the Enter Symbol screen Open the Enter Symbol screen while the device label is selected Press the Art Enter keys Enter Symbol 1 mov Exit Help Move the selection of the device labe
342. y the nesting Range oi master nO number 1 control N1 3 NN SOMNIA I NR Display the nesting 2 ul number NO 2 0 OOo OO X c 2 2 2 Changing display size of editing screen Change the display size of the editing screen Screen display PROGRAM Q1 CONFIGURATIONS Select View Zoom amp Magnification C 150 SETTING LABELS C 100 C T5955 7 50 Specify EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS O oS og Display contents 26 na Item Description 150 100 75 50 Change the display size according to the selected zoom ratio 8 Specify Change the display size according to the specified zoom ratio Auto Adjust the width of the ladder automatically to display the entire ladder 2 TO 25 N X 2 2 2 Changing display size of editing screen 2 5 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 2 3 Changing text size on editing screen Change the text size displayed on the editing screen Operating procedure Select View Text Size gt Bigger Smaller The change is applied to all ladder editors currently opened The text size is changed one step at each setting within the range of 10 steps 100 ba TOO 2 2 4 Displaying hiding comments Display hide device comments label comments notes and statements Operating procedure Select
343. yed in accordance with the display format setting 38 lt MELSAP3 FXCPU gt 3 Number of convergences z Enter SFC Symbol D ta c c D o ial Cancel 0 3 Set the items on the screen 2 s Item Description lt 3 Symbol Select C Ss Number of convergences Enter a number of columns of convergence line Step Attribute This setting is not required 5 Block This setting is not required Comment This setting is not required 4 Click the button The entered selection convergence symbol is displayed lt Overwrite mode gt SETTING LABELS Enter a selection convergence EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 lt zE c t LLI 0o REPLACE 7 3 6 Entering selection convergences fe GX Works2 7 EDITING 5 PROGRAMS Insert mode Enter a selection convergence 7 18 7 3 6 Entering selection convergences 7 3 Creating 5 Diagrams 7 3 7 Entering simultaneous convergences Enter a simultaneous convergence Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Move the cursor to the position where simultaneous convergence is entered Z O 2 Select Edit gt SFC Symbol gt Simultaneous Convergence 8 Q The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol Enter Program screen is displayed in nf accordance with the display format setting 29 lt MELSAP3 FXCPU gt
344. ype Selection Libraries Data Type Word Signed Double Word Signed FLOAT Single Precision String 32 SCREEN Gd CONFIGURATION Retentive Timer Pointer Type Class Simple Types Structured Data Types Function Blocks Array Element ARRAY 9 lt De 9 X PROCEDURE CD 2 O H 5 Operating procedure 2 1 Selecta type in the Type Class cO Item Description 5 Simple Types Specify this to select a data type from basic types such as bit and word Specify this to select a data type from the defined structures letet Pala Types Not displayed for the structure settings Specify this to select data type from the defined function blocks Not displayed for the FB label settings structure settings SETTING LABELS 2 Inthe Libraries field select the reference source such as the defined structure that is used as the data type Item Description lt ALL gt Browse data types and structures function blocks defined in the project and all libraries Browse data types and structures function blocks defined in the project Project Not displayed when Simple Types is selected EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3 In the Data Type field select the data type structure or function block name 4 Click the gt button when the setting is completed The settings are displayed in the Data Type column on the label setting screen EDITING

GX Works 2 Operating Manual Simp

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents